WK POWER SYSTEMS 8N - 1
POWER SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS. . . . 1 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS . . 216
POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . 75 POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION. . . . . 287
POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . 304
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO . . . . . 328
POWER MIRRORS-SERVICE INFORMATION . . . 211 POWER WINDOWS - SERVICE INFORMATION . 335
POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS B1807 PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH – PASSENGER
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW – DOOR MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 B1808 PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH – SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK –
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . 40
B2218, B2219–DOOR MODULE INTERNAL – B1809–PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK –
B1801 DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . 43
SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – CLUSTER . . . 5 B1851–FLIPPER GLASS SWITCH STUCK–
B1803–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
SWITCH INPUT STUCK LOCK– CLUSTER . . . 8 B184E–FLIPPER GLASS CONTROL
B1804–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK CIRCUIT LOW– CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
SWITCH INPUT STUCK UNLOCK– B184F–FLIPPER GLASS CONTROL CIRCUIT
CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 HIGH– CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
B1806–PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK B182D–ALL DOOR LOCK CONTROL
SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – CLUSTER . . 14 CIRCUIT LOW– CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
B1808–PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK B182E–ALL DOOR LOCK CONTROL
SWITCH INPUT STUCK LOCK – CLUSTER . . 17 CIRCUIT HIGH– CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
B1809–PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK B1835–DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK CONTROL
SWITCH INPUT STUCK UNLOCK– CIRCUIT LOW– CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 B1836–DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK CONTROL
B1802–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK CIRCUIT HIGH– CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH – DRIVER DOOR B1839–PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW– CLUSTER . . . . . . 67
B1803–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK B183A–PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK
SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK – DRIVER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH– CLUSTER . . . . . . 70
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS ........... . 73
B1804 DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK –
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . 32
8N - 2 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW – DOOR MODULE
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
At all times.
• Set Condition:
Anytime the module senses voltage input below 9.5 volts, this code will set.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
LOW VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC
DOOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK ENGINE DTC’s
With the scan tool, read ENGINE DTC’s
Are there any ENGINE DTC’s present?
No >> Go to 2
Yes >> Refer to symptom list for problems related to ENGINE.
2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Start the engine and run for 2 minutes.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW?
Yes >> Replace the appropriate Door Module.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 3
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
At all times.
• Set Condition:
Anytime the module senses voltage input above 15.9 volts, this code will set.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK ENGINE DTC’s
With the scan tool, read ENGINE DTC’s
Are there any ENGINE DTC’s present?
No >> Go to 2
Yes >> Refer to symptom list for problems related to ENGINE.
2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Start the engine and run for 2 minutes.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH?
Yes >> Replace the Memory Mirror Module.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
8N - 4 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B2218, B2219–DOOR MODULE INTERNAL – DOOR MODULE
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
At all times
• Set Condition:
Whenever the module detects an EEPROM failure
POSSIBLE CAUSES
DOOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. Replace the Door Module
NOTE: Anytime this code is logged, the module must be replaced.
Repair
Replace the appropriate Door Module.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 5
B1801 DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – CLUSTER
8N - 6 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1801 DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is below 1.5 volts for over 10 seconds.
Possible Causes
(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORT TO GROUND
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Theory of Operation
This code will only set in vehicles that do not have the Memory System.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the Driver Door Lock Switch in all positions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Disconnect the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch connector.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
No >> Replace the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Yes >> Go To 3
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 7
B1801 DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
3. DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Cluster C3 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G161) Driver Door
Lock Switch Mux circuit.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit for
a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Instrument Cluster.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
8N - 8 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1803–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT STUCK LOCK– CLUSTER
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 9
B1803–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT STUCK LOCK– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Cluster senses a Lock input on the Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit for over 30 seconds, this
code will set.
Possible Causes
(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT PARTIAL SHORT TO GROUND
DOOR LOCK SWITCH STUCK
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Theory of Operation
This code will only set in Cluster in vehicles that do not have the Memory System.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the Driver Door Lock Switch in all positions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT STUCK LOCK?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Disconnect the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch connector.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
SWITCH INPUT STUCK LOCK?
No >> Replace the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Yes >> Go To 3
8N - 10 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1803–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT STUCK LOCK– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
3. DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT PARTIAL SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Cluster C3 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the Driver Door Lock
Switch Mux circuit.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit for a short
to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Instrument Cluster.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 11
B1804–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT STUCK UNLOCK– CLUSTER
8N - 12 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1804–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT STUCK UNLOCK– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Cluster senses an Unlock input on the Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit for over 10 seconds, this
code will set.
Possible Causes
(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT PARTIAL SHORT TO GROUND
DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH STUCK
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Theory of Operation
This code will only set in Cluster in vehicles that do not have the Memory System.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the Driver Door Lock Switch in all positions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT STUCK UNLOCK?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
2. DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Disconnect the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch connector.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
SWITCH INPUT STUCK UNLOCK?
No >> Replace the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Yes >> Go To 3
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 13
B1804–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT STUCK UNLOCK– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
3. (G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT PARTIAL SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Cluster C3 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G161) Driver Door
Lock Switch Mux circuit.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit for
a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Instrument Cluster.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
8N - 14 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1806–PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW –
CLUSTER
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 15
B1806–PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is below 0.7 volts for over 10 seconds.
Possible Causes
DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORT TO GROUND
(G160) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Theory of Operation
This code will only set in vehicles that do not have the Memory System.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the Passenger Door Lock Switch in all positions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Diconnect the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch connector.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
No >> Replace the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Yes >> Go To 3
8N - 16 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1806–PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
3. DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Cluster C3 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the Passenger Door Lock
Switch Mux circuit.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Instrument Cluster.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 17
B1808–PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT STUCK LOCK –
CLUSTER
8N - 18 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1808–PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT STUCK LOCK – CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Cluster senses a Lock input on the Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux circuit for over 10 seconds,
this code will set.
Possible Causes
DOOR LOCK SWITCH STUCK
(G160) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT PARTIAL SHORT TO GROUND
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Theory of Operation
This code will only set in Cluster in vehicles that do not have the Memory System.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the Passenger Door Lock Switch in all positions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT STUCK LOCK?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Disconnect the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch connector.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
SWITCH INPUT STUCK LOCK?
No >> Replace the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
Yes >> Go To 3
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 19
B1808–PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT STUCK LOCK – CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
3. (G160) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT PARTIAL SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Cluster C3 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G160) Passenger
Door Lock Switch Mux circuit.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (G160) Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux cir-
cuit for a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Instrument Cluster.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
8N - 20 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1809–PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT STUCK UNLOCK–
CLUSTER
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 21
B1809–PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT STUCK UNLOCK– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Cluster senses an Unlock input on the Passeenger Door Lock Switch Mux circuit for over 10 sec-
onds, this code will set.
Possible Causes
DOOR LOCK SWITCH STUCK
(G160) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT PARTIAL SHORT TO GROUND
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Theory of Operation
This code will only set in Cluster in vehicles that do not have the Memory System.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the Passenger Door Lock Switch in all positions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT STUCK LOCK?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Disconnect the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch connector.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
SWITCH INPUT STUCK UNLOCK?
No >> Replace the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
Yes >> Go To 3
8N - 22 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1809–PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT STUCK UNLOCK– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
3. (G160) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT PARTIAL SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Cluster C3 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G160) Passenger
Door Lock Switch Mux circuit.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (G160) Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux cir-
cuit for a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Instrument Cluster.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 23
B1802–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH – DRIVER DOOR
MODULE
8N - 24 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1802–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH – DRIVER DOOR MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is above 5.25 volts for over 30 msec.
Possible Causes
(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX WIRE SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(P439) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX WIRE SHORT TO VOLTAGE
DRIVER WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Theory of Operation
This code will only set in vehicles that have the Memory System. The supply circuit for the Memory Mirrors are
supplied by the Memory Mirror Module, therefore both the Memory Select Switch Mux or the Door Lock Switch Mux
circuits can cause this DTC.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the Driver Door Lock Switch in both positions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 25
B1802–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH – DRIVER DOOR MODULE (CONTINUED)
2. DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Disconnect the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch connector.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH?
No >> Replace the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Yes >> Go to 3
3. (G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX WIRE SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
Measure the voltage of the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch Mux cir-
cuit in the Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is there any voltage present?
Yes >> Repair the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit for
a short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go to 4
8N - 26 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1802–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH – DRIVER DOOR MODULE (CONTINUED)
4. (P439) MEMORY SELECT MUX WIRE SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector.
Measure the voltage of the (P439) Memory Select Switch Mux circuit.
Is there any voltage present?
Yes >> Repair the (P439) Memory Select Switch Mux wire for a
short to voltage.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES
- STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 27
B1803–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK – DRIVER
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
8N - 28 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1803–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is under 2.6 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX WIRE PARTIAL SHORT TO GROUND
(P439) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX WIRE PARTIAL SHORT TO GROUND
(P439) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (G920) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH
RETURN CIRCUIT
MEMORY SELECTOR SWITCH
DRIVER WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH STUCK
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Theory of Operation
This code will only set in vehicles that have the Memory System. The supply circuit for the Memory Mirrors are
supplied by the Memory Mirror Module, therefore both the Memory Select Switch Mux or the Door Lock Switch Mux
circuits can cause this DTC.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the Driver Door Lock Switch in both positions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 29
B1803–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MOD-
ULE (CONTINUED)
2. DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED TO GROUND
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Disconnect the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch connector.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK?
No >> Replace the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Yes >> Go to 3
3. (G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX WIRE SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G161) Driver Door
Lock Switch Mux circuit in the Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit for
a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go to 4
8N - 30 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1803–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MOD-
ULE (CONTINUED)
4. (P439) MEMORY SELECT MUX WIRE SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P439) Memory
Select Switch Mux circuit.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (P439) Memory Select Switch Mux wire for a
short to ground.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES
- STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go to 5
5. MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED
Measure the resistance between the (P439) Memory Select Switch
Mux circuit and the (G920) Memory Select Switch Return circuit in the
Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Go to 6
No >> Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 31
B1803–DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MOD-
ULE (CONTINUED)
6. MEMORY SELECTOR SWITCH SHORTED
Disconnect the Memory Selector Switch connector.
Measure the resistance between the (P439) Memory Select Switch
Mux circuit and the (G920) Memory Select Switch Return circuit in the
Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (P439) Memory Select Switch Mux circuit for a
short to the (G920) Memory Select Switch Return circuit.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES
- STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Memory Selector Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
8N - 32 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1804 DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK – DRIVER
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 33
B1804 DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is under 1.5 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX WIRE PARTIAL SHORT TO GROUND
(P439) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX WIRE PARTIAL SHORT TO GROUND
(P439) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (G920) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH
RETURN CIRCUIT
MEMORY SELECTOR SWITCH
DRIVER WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH STUCK
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Theory of Operation
This code will only set in vehicles that have the Memory System. The supply circuit for the Memory Mirrors are
supplied by the Memory Mirror Module, therefore both the Memory Select Switch Mux or the Door Lock Switch Mux
circuits can cause this DTC.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the Driver Door Lock Switch in both positions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
8N - 34 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1804 DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
2. DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED TO GROUND
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Disconnect the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch connector.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK?
No >> Replace the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Yes >> Go to 3
3. (G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX WIRE SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G161) Driver Door
Lock Switch Mux circuit in the Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit for
a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go to 4
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 35
B1804 DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
4. (P439) MEMORY SELECT MUX WIRE SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P439) Memory
Select Switch Mux circuit.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (P439) Memory Select Switch Mux wire for a
short to ground.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES
- STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go to 5
5. (P439) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED
Measure the resistance between the (P439) Memory Select Switch
Mux circuit and the (G920) Memory Select Switch Return circuit in the
Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Go to 6
No >> Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
8N - 36 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1804 DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
6. MEMORY SELECTOR SWITCH SHORTED
Disconnect the Memory Selector Switch connector.
Measure the resistance between the (P439) Memory Select Switch
Mux circuit and the (G920) Memory Select Switch Return circuit in the
Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (P439) Memory Select Switch Mux circuit for a
short to the (G920) Memory Select Switch Return circuit.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES
- STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Memory Selector Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 37
B1807 PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH – PASSENGER
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
8N - 38 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1807 PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH – PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is above 5.25 volts for over 30 msec.
Possible Causes
(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX WIRE PARTIAL SHORT TO VOLTAGE
PASSENGER WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH STUCK
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the Passenger Door Lock Switch in both positions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Disconnect the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch connector.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH?
No >> Replace the Window/Door Lock Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Yes >> Go to 3
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 39
B1807 PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH – PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. (G160) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Measure the voltage of the (G160) Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux
circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is there any voltage present?
Yes >> Repair the (G160) Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux cir-
cuit for a short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
8N - 40 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1808 PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK –
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 41
B1808 PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK – PASSENGER MEMORY
MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is under 2.6 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX WIRE PARTIAL SHORT TO GROUND
PASSENGER WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH STUCK
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the Door Lock Switch from the side this DTC was set in. Put the switch in both positions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
2. PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED TO GROUND
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Disconnect the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch connector.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK?
No >> Replace the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Yes >> Go to 3
8N - 42 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1808 PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK – PASSENGER MEMORY MIR-
ROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. (G160) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G160) Passenger
Door Lock Switch Mux circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror Module
connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (G160) Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux cir-
cuit for a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 43
B1809–PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK –
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
8N - 44 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1809–PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK – PASSENGER MEMORY
MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is under 1.5 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX WIRE PARTIAL SHORT TO GROUND
PASSENGER WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH STUCK
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the Passenger Door Lock Switch in both positions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED TO GROUND
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Disconnect the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch connector.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIR-
CUIT STUCK UNLOCK?
No >> Replace the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Yes >> Go to 3
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 45
B1809–PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK – PASSENGER MEMORY
MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. (G160) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G160) Passenger
Door Lock Switch Mux circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror Module
connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (G160) Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux cir-
cuit for a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
8N - 46 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1851–FLIPPER GLASS SWITCH STUCK– CLUSTER
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 47
B1851–FLIPPER GLASS SWITCH STUCK– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Cluster senses a low condition on the Flip-UP (Flipper) Glass Switch Sense circuit for over 10 sec-
onds, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q80) FLIP-UP GLASS SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
FLIP-UP GLASS SWITCH (LICENSE LAMP) STUCK
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the Flip-Up Glass Switch several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display FLIPPER GLASS SWITCH STUCK?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. FLIP-UP GLASS SWITCH STUCK
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Disconnect the License Lamp connector.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display FLIPPER GLASS SWITCH STUCK?
No >> Replace the Flip-Up Glass Switch (License Lamp).
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Yes >> Go To 3
8N - 48 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1851–FLIPPER GLASS SWITCH STUCK– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
3. FLIP-UP GLASS SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Cluster C3 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the Flip-Up Glass Switch
Sense circuit.
Is the resistance below 1000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the Flip-Up Glass Switch Sense circuit for a short
to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Instrument Cluster.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 49
B184E–FLIPPER GLASS CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW– CLUSTER
8N - 50 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B184E–FLIPPER GLASS CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Cluster senses a low condition on the Flip-UP (Flipper) Glass Relay Control circuit for over 10 sec-
onds, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q82) FLIP-UP GLASS RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
FLIP-UP GLASS RELAY
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the Flip-Up Glass Switch several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display FLIPPER GLASS RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. FLIP-UP GLASS RELAY SHORTED
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Install a substitute relay in place of the Flip-Up Glass relay (in Junction
Block).
With the scan tool actuate the Flip-Up Glass.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display FLIPPER GLASS RELAY CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW?
No >> Replace the Flip-Up Glass relay.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Yes >> Go To 3
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 51
B184E–FLIPPER GLASS CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
3. (Q82) FLIP-UP GLASS RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off.
Remove the Flip-Up Glass relay.
Disconnect the Cluster C2 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q82) Flip-Up Glass
Relay Control circuit.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (Q82) Flip-Up Glass Relay Control circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Instrument Cluster in accordance with service
information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
8N - 52 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B184F–FLIPPER GLASS CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH– CLUSTER
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 53
B184F–FLIPPER GLASS CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Cluster senses a high condition on the Flip-UP (Flipper) Glass Relay Control circuit for over 10
seconds, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q82) FLIP-UP GLASS RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY
FLIP-UP GLASS RELAY
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the Flip-Up Glass Switch several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display FLIPPER GLASS RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. FLIP-UP GLASS RELAY SHORTED
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Install a substitute relay in place of the Flip-Up Glass relay (in Junction
Block).
With the scan tool actuate the Flip-Up Glass.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display FLIPPER GLASS RELAY CONTROL
CIRCUIT HIGH?
No >> Replace the Flip-Up Glass relay.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Yes >> Go To 3
8N - 54 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B184F–FLIPPER GLASS CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
3. (Q82) FLIP-UP GLASS RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY
Turn the ignition off.
Remove the Flip-Up Glass relay.
Disconnect the Cluster C2 connector.
Measure the voltage between ground and the (Q82) Flip-Up Glass
Relay Control circuit in the Cluster C2 connector..
Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?
Yes >> Repair the (Q82) Flip-Up Glass Relay Control circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Instrument Cluster in accordance with service
information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 55
B182D–ALL DOOR LOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW– CLUSTER
8N - 56 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B182D–ALL DOOR LOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Cluster senses a low condition on the (P777) Door Lock Relay Control circuit for over 10 seconds,
this code will set.
Possible Causes
(P777) DOOR LOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
JUNCTION BLOCK
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Theory of Operation
If the (P777) Door Lock Relay Control circuit has been shorted to ground for any length of time, the door latch
solenoids are probably damaged. Check all the door latches after the short is repaired..
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the door locks several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display ALL DOOR LOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 57
B182D–ALL DOOR LOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
2. DOOR LOCK RELAY SHORTED
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Cluster C2 connector.
Remove the PDC fuse #13.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P777) Door Lock
Relay Control circuit in the Cluster C2 connector
Is the resistance below 1000.0 ohms?
No >> Replace the Instrument Cluster in accordance with service
information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (P777) DOOR LOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Junction Block C2 connector (on top of junction block).
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P777) Door Lock
Relay Control circuit in the Cluster C2 connector.
Is the resistance below 1000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (P777) Door Lock Relay Control circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Junction Block in accordance with service
information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
8N - 58 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B182E–ALL DOOR LOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH– CLUSTER
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 59
B182E–ALL DOOR LOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Cluster senses a high condition on the (P777) Door Lock Relay Control circuit for over 10 seconds,
this code will set.
Possible Causes
(P777) DOOR LOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY
JUNCTION BLOCK
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the door locks several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display ALL DOOR LOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. DOOR LOCK RELAY SHORTED TO BATTERY
NOTE: Ensure the doors are unlocked and the windows down
before proceeding.
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Cluster C2 connector.
Momentarily connect a jumper wire between the (P777) Door Lock
Relay Control circuit and the (Z905) Ground circuit in the Cluster C2
connector.
Did the doors lock?
Yes >> Replace the Instrument Cluster in accordance with service
information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go To 3
8N - 60 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B182E–ALL DOOR LOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
3. (P777) DOOR LOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
Disconnect the Junction Block C2 connector (on top of junction block).
Measure the voltage between ground and the (P777) Door Lock Relay
Control circuit in the Cluster C2 connector.
Turn the ignition on.
Is there any voltage present?
Yes >> Repair the (P777) Door Lock Relay Control circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Junction Block in accordance with service
information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 61
B1835–DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW– CLUSTER
8N - 62 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1835–DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Cluster senses a low condition on the (P1) Driver Door Unlock Relay Control circuit for over 10
seconds, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(P1) DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
JUNCTION BLOCK
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Theory of Operation
If the (P1) Driver Door Unlock Relay Control circuit has been shorted to ground for any length of time, the driver
door latch solenoid will probably be damaged. Check the driver door latch after the short is repaired..
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the door locks several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 63
B1835–DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
2. DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK RELAY SHORTED
Turn the ignition off.
Remove the PDC fuse #13.
Disconnect the Cluster C2 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P1) Driver Door
Unlock Relay Control circuit in the Cluster C2 connector
Is the resistance below 1000.0 ohms?
No >> Replace the Instrument Cluster in accordance with service
information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (P1) DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Junction Block C2 connector (on top of junction block).
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P1) Driver Door
Unlock Relay Control circuit in the Cluster C2 connector.
Is the resistance below 1000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (P1) Driver Door Unlock Relay Control circuit
for a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Junction Block in accordance with service
information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
8N - 64 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1836–DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH– CLUSTER
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 65
B1836–DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Cluster senses a high condition on the (P1) Driver Door Unlock Relay Control circuit for over 10
seconds, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(P1) DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY
JUNCTION BLOCK
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the door locks several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. DOOR LOCK RELAY SHORTED TO BATTERY
NOTE: Ensure the windows are down before proceeding.
Turn the ignition off.
Lock the driver door.
Disconnect the Cluster C2 connector.
Momentarily connect a jumper wire between the (P1) Driver Door
Unlock Relay Control circuit and the (Z905) Ground circuit in the Clus-
ter C2 connector.
Did the driver door unlock?
Yes >> Replace the Instrument Cluster in accordance with service
information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go To 3
8N - 66 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1836–DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
3. (P1) DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
Disconnect the Junction Block C2 connector (on top of junction block).
Turn the ignition on.
Measure the voltage between ground and the (P1) Driver Door Unlock
Relay Control circuit in the Cluster C2 connector.
Is there any voltage present?
Yes >> Repair the (P1) Driver Door Unlock Relay Control circuit
for a short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Junction Block in accordance with service
information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 67
B1839–PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW– CLUSTER
8N - 68 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1839–PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Cluster senses a low condition on the (P292) Passenger Doors Unlock Relay Control circuit for over
10 seconds, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(P292) PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
JUNCTION BLOCK
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Theory of Operation
If the (P292) Door Unlock Relay Control circuit has been shorted to ground for any length of time, the door latch
solenoids will probably be damaged. Check the door latches after the short is repaired..
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the door locks several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 69
B1839–PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
2. DOOR UNLOCK RELAY SHORTED
Turn the ignition off.
Remove the PDC fuse #13.
Disconnect the Cluster C2 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P292) Door Unlock
Relay Control circuit in the Cluster C2 connector
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
No >> Replace the Instrument Cluster in accordance with service
information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Yes >> Go To 3
3. (P292) DOOR UNLOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Junction Block C2 connector (on top of junction block).
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P292) Door Unlock
Relay Control circuit in the Cluster C2 connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (P292) Door Unlock Relay Control circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Junction Block in accordance with service
information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
8N - 70 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B183A–PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH– CLUSTER
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 71
B183A–PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
For the Power Door Lock circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Cluster senses a high condition on the (P292) Door Unlock Relay Control circuit for over 10 sec-
onds, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(P292) DOOR UNLOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY
JUNCTION BLOCK
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s.
Operate the door locks several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. DOOR UNLOCK RELAY SHORTED TO BATTERY
NOTE: Ensure the windows are down before proceeding.
Turn the ignition off.
Lock the all doors.
Disconnect the Cluster C2 connector.
Momentarily connect a jumper wire between the (P292) Door Unlock
Relay Control circuit and the (Z905) Ground circuit in the Cluster C2
connector.
Did the doors unlock?
Yes >> Replace the Instrument Cluster in accordance with service
information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go To 3
8N - 72 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B183A–PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH– CLUSTER (CONTINUED)
3. (P292) DOOR UNLOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
Disconnect the Junction Block C2 connector (on top of junction block).
Turn the ignition on.
Measure the voltage between ground and the (P292) Door Unlock
Relay Control circuit in the Cluster C2 connector.
Is there any voltage present?
Yes >> Repair the (P292) Door Unlock Relay Control circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Junction Block in accordance with service
information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 73
SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS
WK DOOR LOCKS MEMORY CKT DIAGRAM
8N - 74 POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
WK DOOR LOCKS BASE CKT DIAGRAM
WK POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 75
POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
POWER LOCKS .................... . . 77 SPECIFICATIONS
POWER LOCK MOTOR REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER . 79
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
POWER LOCK MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . 80
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER . 78 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
STANDARD PROCEDURE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY CUSTOMER
PREFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
POWER LOCKS
The power lock system allows all of the doors and liftgate to be locked or unlocked electrically by operating a switch
on either front door trim panel. The power lock system receives non-switched battery current through a fuse in the
Junction Block (JB), so that the power locks remain operational, regardless of the ignition switch position.
The instrument cluster locks the doors automatically when the vehicle is driven beyond the speed of 25.7 Km/h (15
mph), all doors are closed, and the accelerator pedal is depressed. The rolling door lock feature can be disabled if
desired.
This vehicle also offers several customer programmable features, which allows the selection of several optional
electronic features to suit individual preferences.
The power lock system for this vehicle can also be operated remotely using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitters.
DOOR LOCK MOTORS
The lock mechanisms are actuated by a reversible electric motor mounted within each door. The power lock motors
are integral to the door latch units.
The power lock motors cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if faulty or damaged, the door latch unit must be
replaced.
CENTRAL LOCKING/UNLOCKING
The central locking system controls powered operation of the door and liftgate locks and the illuminated entry sys-
tem. Central locking included the following features:
• Automatic locking of the doors and liftgate when the vehicle speed exceeds 13 km/h (8 mph).
• Locking prevention with a door lock switch or the RKE transmitter if the key is in the ignition switch and the
driver’s door is open.
• Driver selectable unlocking mode: unlock only the driver’s door or all doors and the liftgate with one press of
the RKE transmitter unlock button.
• Automatic illumination of interior courtesy lamps when the vehicle is unlocked.
8N - 76 POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION WK
• Locking all doors and the liftgate by pressing the lock button on the RKE transmitter, or by pressing a lock
switch on one of the front doors.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment, the Enhanced Accident Response System switches on the
interior lamps and unlocks the doors after the vehicle has stopped. This helps emergency personnel render appro-
priate assistance. The lamps remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is standard on this vehicle. It locks and unlocks doors and liftgate, turns on interior
lamps, and arms and disarms the Vehicle Theft Security System (if equipped). The RKE system operates on non-
switched battery current through a fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM), so that the system remains opera-
tional, regardless of the ignition switch position.
The RKE transmitters are also equipped with a Panic button. If the Panic button on the RKE transmitter is
depressed, the horn will sound and the exterior lights will flash on the vehicle for about three minutes, or until the
Panic button is depressed a second time. A vehicle speed of about 25.7 kilometers-per-hour (15 miles-per-hour) will
also cancel the panic event.
The RKE system can also perform other functions on this vehicle. If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Vehicle
Theft Security System (VTSS), the RKE transmitter will arm the VTSS when the Lock button is depressed, and
disarm the VTSS when the Unlock button is depressed.
The RKE system includes two transmitters when the vehicle is shipped from the factory, but the system can retain
the vehicle access codes of up to a total of four transmitters. The transmitter codes are retained in the RKE module
memory, even if the battery is disconnected. If an RKE transmitter is faulty or lost, new transmitter vehicle access
codes can be programmed into the system using a scan tool.
This vehicle also offers several customer programmable features, which allows the selection of several optional
electronic features to suit individual preferences. Customer programmable feature options affecting the RKE system
include:
• Remote Unlock Sequence - Allows the option of having only the driver side front door unlock when the RKE
transmitter Unlock button is depressed the first time. The remaining doors unlock when the button is depressed
a second time within 5 seconds of the first unlock press. Another option is having all doors and liftgate unlock
upon the first depression of the RKE transmitter Unlock button.
• Sound Horn on Lock - Allows the option of having the horn sound a short chirp as an audible verification that
the RKE system received a valid Lock request from the RKE transmitter, or having no audible verification (not
available in all areas).
• Flash Lights with Lock and Unlock - Allows the option of having the park lamps flash as an optical verifi-
cation that the RKE system received a valid Lock request or Unlock request from the RKE transmitter, or hav-
ing no optical verification.
• Programming Additional Transmitters - Allows up to a total of four transmitter vehicle access codes to be
stored in the receiver memory.
Certain functions and features of the RKE system rely upon resources shared with other electronic modules in the
vehicle over the CAN data bus network. For diagnosis of these electronic modules or of the data bus network, the
use of a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information are required.
OPERATION
POWER LOCKS
The instrument cluster locks or unlocks the doors when an actuation input signal from a door lock switch or Memory
Mirror Module is received. The instrument cluster turns on the output drivers and provides a voltage level to the
door lock motor for a specified time. All passenger doors can be locked or unlocked using a mechanical button
mounted on the door trim panel. The drivers door can be locked or unlocked by using the key cylinder.
DOOR LOCK MOTORS
The door lock motors are controlled by the instrument cluster. A positive and negative battery connection to the two
motor terminals will cause the motor to move in one direction. Reversing the current will cause the motor to move
in the opposite direction.
WK POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 77
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
• LOCK: Pressing the LOCK button locks all doors, sounds horn (chirp) once if enabled, flashes the park lamps
once if enabled, and arms the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS), if enabled. The chirp verifies that the
instrument cluster has sent a message for door lock operation. If a door has not been closed before pressing
the LOCK button, the vehicle may not be secured and the VTSS (if equipped) will not arm until the door is
closed.
• UNLOCK: Pressing the UNLOCK button once will unlock the driver’s door first if enabled, flashes the park
lamps twice if enabled, activates the illuminated entry system, and disarms the Vehicle Theft Security System
(VTSS), if equipped. Pressing the UNLOCK button twice within five seconds will unlock all doors, if driver’s
door first is enabled.
• PANIC: Pressing the PANIC button sounds the horns at half second intervals, flashes the exterior lamps, and
turns ON the interior lamps. The panic alarm will remain on for three minutes, or until the PANIC button is
actuated again or the vehicle speed exceeds 25.7 Km/h (15 mph) will cancel the panic event.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
POWER LOCKS
The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the power lock system requires the use of a
scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information.
Following are tests that will help to diagnose the hard wired components and circuits of the power lock system.
However, these tests may not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of this system. In order to obtain conclusive testing
of the power lock system, the CAN data bus network must be checked.
Refer to the appropriate wiring information.
PRELIMINARY DIAGNOSIS
As a preliminary diagnosis for the power lock system, note the system operation while you actuate both the Lock
and Unlock functions with the power lock switches and with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Then,
proceed as follows:
• If the entire power lock system fails to function with either the power lock switches or the RKE transmitter,
check the fuse in the Junction Block (JB).
• If the power lock system functions with both power lock switches, but not with the RKE transmitter, proceed to
diagnosis of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system.
• If the power lock system functions with the RKE transmitter, but not with one or both power lock switches,
proceed to diagnosis of the door lock switches.
• If the driver side power lock switch operates only the driver side front door power lock motor, but all other
power lock motors operate with the passenger side power lock switch or the RKE transmitter, use a scan tool
and the appropriate diagnostic information to diagnose the CAN data bus.
• If only one power lock motor fails to operate with both power lock switches and the RKE transmitter, use a
scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information to diagnose the CAN data bus.
POWER LOCK MOTOR
DESCRIPTION
The lock mechanisms are actuated by a reversible electric motor mounted within each door. The power lock motors
are integral to the door latch units.
The power lock motors cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if faulty or damaged, the door latch unit must be
replaced.
OPERATION
The door lock motors are controlled by the instrument cluster. A positive and negative battery connection to the two
motor terminals will cause the motor to move in one direction. Reversing the current will cause the motor to move
in the opposite direction.
8N - 78 POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION WK
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
POWER LOCK MOTOR
The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the power lock system requires the use of a scan tool
and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information.
Refer to the appropriate wiring information.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
Using special tool 9001, first test to ensure that the
transmitter is functioning. Typical testing distance is
2.5 centimeters (1 inch) for Asian transmitters and
30.5 centimeters (12 inches) for all others. To test,
position the transmitter as shown. Press any transmit-
ter button, then test each button individually. The tool
will beep if a radio signal strength that lights five or
more LED’s is detected. Repeat this test three times.
If transmitter fails any of the test refer to the proper
Diagnostic Procedures information.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY CUSTOMER PREFERENCES
HORN CHIRP DISABLING/ENABLING
The horn chirp can be toggled using a scan tool or by using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
To DISABLE (cancel) the horn chirp feature: With the ignition in the ON position, press and hold the transmitter
LOCK button for four seconds. While pressing the LOCK button in, press the PANIC button within 6 seconds.
Release both buttons when a single chime is heard.
To ENABLE the horn chirp feature, repeat the above procedure.
UNLOCK SEQUENCE
The unlock sequence can be toggled using a scan tool or by using the following procedure.
1. Place the key in the ignition.
2. Within 10 seconds, cycle the key from the OFF position to the ON position four times, ending in the ON position
(Do not start the engine).
3. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch in the UNLOCK direction. A single chime will be heard to
indicate the feature has been disabled.
This will toggle between Driver door first and Unlock all doors function.
To ENABLE this feature, repeat the above procedure.
WK POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 79
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER BATTERIES
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter case snaps open and shut for battery access. To replace the RKE
transmitter batteries:
1. Using a trim stick or a thin coin, gently pry at the notch in the center seam of the RKE transmitter case halves
located near the key ring until the two halves unsnap.
2. Lift the back half of the transmitter case off of the RKE transmitter.
3. Remove the two batteries from the RKE transmitter.
4. Replace the battery with a new CR2016. Be certain that the battery is installed with the polarity correctly ori-
ented.
5. Align the two RKE transmitter case halves with each other, and squeeze them firmly and evenly together using
hand pressure until they snap back into place.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING
If vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key Theft Deterrent, new Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be
programed using a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures manual. If vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key
Theft Deterrent, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
SPECIFICATIONS
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
Normal operation range is up to 10 meters/32 feet (3 meters/10 feet in Japan) of the vehicle. Range may be better
or worse depending on the environment around the vehicle.
SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK
DESCRIPTION
A window/lock switch located in each front door trim
panel. The driver’s side window/lock switch includes
the following:
• Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary,
resistor multiplexed switch to control the power
lock system.
• Power Window Lockout Switch - A two-way,
latching, push-button switch allows the vehicle
operator to lock out the power window switches
on each passenger door so that the passenger
door power windows may be operated only from
the master switches.
• Power Window Switches - A two-way, momen-
tary power window switch for the driver side front
door also has a second detent in the Down
direction and internal circuitry to provide an Auto-
Down feature for the driver side front door power
window. In addition to the power window switch
for its own door, the window/lock switch houses
individual master switches for each passenger door power window.
The passenger side window/lock switch includes the following:
• Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system.
• Power Window Switch - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the passenger side front door.
8N - 80 POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION WK
OPERATION
The driver side window/lock switch combines a power lock switch, a driver power window switch with an Auto-down
feature, master switches for each passenger door power window, a power window lockout switch, a power mirror
selector switch, and four power mirror adjustment switches in a single assembly. The switches in the window/lock
switch can be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and methods.
Power Lock Switch
The power lock switch circuitry is connected in series between ground and the driver door switch mux input of the
instrument cluster (without memory). If equipped with the memory system, the circuitry is connected to the memory
mirror module. Each power lock switch position (Lock, Unlock, and Neutral) provides a different resistance value to
the instrument cluster or memory mirror input, which allows the instrument cluster or memory module to sense the
switch position. Based upon the power lock switch input, the instrument cluster or memory module controls the
battery and ground feed outputs to the individual power lock motors to lock or unlock the door latches. The Light-
Emitting Diode (LED) in the power lock switch is connected to battery current through the power window circuit
breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the switch
will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions.
Power Window Switches
The power window switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a circuit breaker in the Integrated Power
Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the power windows will operate whenever
the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Each two-way, momentary master passenger power window
switch in the window/lock switch provides battery current and ground to the individual power window switches on
each passenger door so that the power window switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to its respec-
tive power window motor. The switch for the driver side front door power window includes an auto-down feature.
When this switch is depressed to a second momentary detent position and released, the driver door power window
is automatically operated through an internal circuit and relay to its fully lowered position. The Auto-down event is
cancelled if the switch paddle is depressed a second time in either the Up or Down direction. When the two position
window lockout switch in the window/lock switch is depressed and latched in the lockout position, the battery current
feed to each of the individual passenger power window switches is interrupted so that the passenger door power
windows can only be operated from the switches in the window/lock switch. The window lockout switch also controls
the battery current feed for the LED in each passenger power window switch so that the switch will not be illumi-
nated when it is locked out.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH
The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the window/lock switch power window and power lock
switches receive battery current through the circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If only one LED
in the door module is inoperative, replace the faulty door module. If the driver side front door power window oper-
ates in a normal manner, but the Auto-Down feature is inoperative, replace the faulty window/lock switch. Refer to
the appropriate wiring information.
1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the window/lock switch from the door trim panel.
Disconnect the door wire harness connectors from the switch.
2. Test the switch continuity. See the Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect
switches in each switch position. If not OK, replace the faulty window/lock switch as required.
WK POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 81
WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH TEST
POWER LOCK SWITCH
SWITCH POSITION RESISTANCE BETWEEN C-1 PINS 8 & 3
LOCK 330 OHMS ± 5%
UNLOCK 100 OHMS ± 5%
POWER WINDOW SWITCHES - DRIVER DOOR
SWITCH POSITION CONTINUITY BETWEEN PINS OF C-1
PINS 4 (C1) & 6 (C2)
PINS 4 (C1) & 5 (C2)
NEUTRAL PINS 4 (C1) & 1 (C2)
PINS 4 (C1) & 4 (C2)
PINS 4 (C1) & 2 (C2)
LEFT FRONT UP PINS 2 & 7 (C1)
LEFT FRONT DOWN PINS 2 & 6 (C1)
RIGHT FRONT UP PINS 2 (C1) & 6 (C2)
RIGHT FRONT DOWN PINS 2 (C1) & 5 (C2)
LEFT REAR UP PINS 2 (C1) & 1 (C2)
LEFT REAR DOWN PINS 2 (C1) & 4 (C2)
RIGHT REAR UP PINS 2 (C1) & 2 (C2)
RIGHT REAR DOWN PINS 2 (C1) & 3 (C2)
POWER WINDOW SWITCH - PASSENGER DOOR
UP PINS 4 & 3
DOWN PINS 4 & 2
NEUTRAL PINS 1 & 2 AND 3 & 8
POWER WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
SWITCH POSITION CONTINUITY BETWEEN
OFF (SWITCH BUTTON RAISED - NOT DEPRESSED) PINS 2 AND 5 OF C-1
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
2. Using a trim stick, start at the rear of the switch
and pry up to remove from door trim panel.
3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors from
switch.
8N - 82 POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION WK
INSTALLATION
1. Connect electrical harness connectors to switch.
2. Insert front end of switch into door trim panel open-
ing. Press into place.
3. Connect battery negative cable.
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 83
POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL B1D35, B1D39–MIRROR HEATER CONTROL
DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUIT OPEN – MEMORY MIRROR
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
B1DA7–SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT B1D4C–MEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW — PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR HIGH – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
B1D0A, B1D13–MIRROR POSITION B1D4D–MEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH STUCK – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
– MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . 85 MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
B1D0C, B1D15–MIRROR VERTICAL B1D53–SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW LOW — DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
– MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . 91 MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
B1D0D, B1D16–MIRROR VERTICAL B210D–BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW –
POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
– MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . 98 B210E–BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH –
B1D0F, B1D18–MIRROR HORIZONTAL MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW B2218–DOOR MODULE INTERNAL –
– MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . 104 DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . 198
B1D04–MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT B2219–DOOR MODULE INTERNAL –
CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE – DRIVER PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . 199
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 U0141–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D07–MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
CIRCUIT STUCK – DRIVER MEMORY U0151–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER
B1D09, B1D12–MIRROR POSITION (ORC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW U0154–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
– MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . 125 OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE . . . 200
B1D1B, B1D27–MIRROR MOTOR COMMON U0155–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 U0156–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D1C, B1D28–MIRROR MOTOR COMMON EOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY U0159–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE . . . . 200
B1D1F, B1D2B–MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR U0164–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 U0167–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D10, B1D19–MIRROR HORIZONTAL INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER CONTROL
POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
– MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . 150 U0168–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D20, B1D2C–MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY (SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 U0169–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D23, B1D2F–MIRROR HORIZONTAL SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . 201
MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – U0184–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
B1D24, B1D30–MIRROR HORIZONTAL U0186–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH – AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 U0195–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D33, B1D37–MIRROR HEATER CONTROL SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8N - 84 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
U0196–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH U0212–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL SCCM - CAN-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 U0231–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RAIN
U0197–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
HANDS FREE PHONE MODULE . . . . . . . . . 202 U0241–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUTO
U0199–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HIGHBEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL
DRIVER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
U0200–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH U1000–CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT– MEMORY
PASSENGER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . 202 MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
U0208–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH U1001–CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT– MEMORY
HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . 202 MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
U0209–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . 210
MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . 203
POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
B1DA7–SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW — PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
If the Passenger Memory Mirror Module detects an internal module failure.
Possible Causes
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. REPLACE THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Repair
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 85
B1D0A, B1D13–MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH –
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
8N - 86 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D0A, B1D13–MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
DTC B1D0A – If the Driver Memory Mirror Module senses voltage is greater than 5.5 volts for more than 30
ms on the (P669) Driver Mirror Sensor Supply circuit.
DTC B1D13 – If the Passenger Memory Mirror Module senses voltage is greater than 5.5 volts for more than
30 ms on the (P666) Passenger Mirror Sensor Supply circuit.
Possible Causes
FOR THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P669) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(P669) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN
(P69) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR OPEN
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
FOR THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P666) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(P666) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN
(P66) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR OPEN
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: This procedure addresses the Driver Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components and the Pas-
senger Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the system you
are diagnosing.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D0A or B1D13 MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 87
B1D0A, B1D13–MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
2. TEST FOR A SHORTED OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Measure the voltage between the (P669) Driver Mirror Sensor
Supply circuit and the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground circuit.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Measure the voltage between the (P666) Passenger Mirror Sen-
sor Supply circuit and the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground
circuit.
What is the voltage?
4.8 Volts To 5.2 Volts
Replace the Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with
the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Below 4.8 Volts
Go To 3
Above 5.2 Volts
Go To 5
8N - 88 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D0A, B1D13–MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (P669) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OR THE (P666) PASSENGER MIRROR
SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
• Measure the resistance of the (P669) Driver Mirror Sensor Sup-
ply circuit between the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector
and the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
• Measure the resistance of the (P666) Passenger Mirror Sensor
Supply circuit between the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror
connector and the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes >> Go To 4
No, Driver MMM
Repair the (P669) Driver Mirror Sensor Supply circuit for
an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P666) Passenger Mirror Sensor Supply circuit
for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 89
B1D0A, B1D13–MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (P69) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OR (P66) PASSENGER MIRROR
SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance of the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground
circuit between the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector and
the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance of the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor
Ground circuit between the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror
connector and the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance
with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accor-
dance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Repair the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground circuit for an
open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 90 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D0A, B1D13–MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (P669) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OR THE (P666) PASSENGER MIRROR
SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Measure the voltage of the (P669) Driver Mirror Sensor Supply
circuit.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Measure the voltage of the (P666) Passenger Mirror Sensor Sup-
ply circuit.
Is the voltage above 0.2 volts?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P669) Driver Mirror Sensor Supply circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P666) Passenger Mirror Sensor Supply circuit
for a short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 91
B1D0C, B1D15–MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW –
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
8N - 92 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D0C, B1D15–MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
The (P67) Driver Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit supplies input to the Driver Memory Mirror Module. DTC
B1D0C will set if the input value is less than the known good (stored) value for more than 60 ms.
The (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit supplies input to the Passenger Memory Mirror
Module. DTC B1D15 will set if the input value is less than the known good (stored) value for more than 60 ms.
Possible Causes
FOR THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P67) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P67) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT
(P67) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P69) DRIVER MIRROR
SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
(P67) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (C910) DRIVER MIRROR
HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
FOR THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z908) GROUND CIRCUIT
(P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P66) PASSENGER
MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
(P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (C917) PASSENGER
MIRROR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: This procedure addresses the Driver Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components and the Pas-
senger Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the system you
are diagnosing.
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 93
B1D0C, B1D15–MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D0C or B1D15 MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
2. TEST FOR A SHORTED OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
• Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
• Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D0C or B1D15 MIRROR VER-
TICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 94 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D0C, B1D15–MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (P67) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OR THE (P64) PASSENGER
MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
• Measure the resistance between ground and the (P67) Driver
Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit in the Driver Memory Mirror
Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
• Measure the resistance between ground and the (P64) Passen-
ger Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit in the Passenger Mem-
ory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P67) Driver Mirror Vertical Position Signal cir-
cuit for a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal
circuit for a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 4
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 95
B1D0C, B1D15–MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (P67) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE
(Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z908) GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P67) Driver Mirror Vertical
Position Signal circuit and the (Z911) Ground circuit in the Driver
Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P64) Passenger Mirror Ver-
tical Position Signal circuit and the (Z908) Ground circuit in the
Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P67) Driver Mirror Vertical Position Signal cir-
cuit for a short to the (Z911) Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal
circuit for a short to the (Z908) Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 5
8N - 96 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D0C, B1D15–MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (P67) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P69)
DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION
SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P66) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P67) Driver Mirror Vertical
Position Signal circuit and the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground
circuit in the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P64) Passenger Mirror Ver-
tical Position Signal circuit and the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sen-
sor Ground circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror Module
connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P67) Driver Mirror Vertical Position Signal cir-
cuit for a short to the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground
circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal
circuit for a short to the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor
Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 6
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 97
B1D0C, B1D15–MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
6. CHECK THE (P67) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE
(C910) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL
POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (C917) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER GROUND
CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P67) Driver Mirror Vertical
Position Signal circuit and the (C910) Driver Mirror Heater
Ground circuit in the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P64) Passenger Mirror Ver-
tical Position Signal circuit and the (C917) Passenger Mirror
Heater Ground circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror Module
connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P67) Driver Mirror Vertical Position Signal cir-
cuit for a short to the (C910) Driver Mirror Heater Ground
circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal
circuit for a short to the (C917) Passenger Mirror Heater
Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 98 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D0D, B1D16–MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH –
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 99
B1D0D, B1D16–MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
The (P67) Driver Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit supplies input to the Driver Memory Mirror Module. DTC
B1D0D will set if the input value is greater than the known good (stored) value for more than 60 ms.
The (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit supplies input to the Passenger Memory Mirror
Module. DTC B1D16 will set if the input value is greater than the known good (stored) value for more than 60
ms.
Possible Causes
FOR THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P67) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(P67) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(P69) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
FOR THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(P66) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: This procedure addresses the Driver Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components and the Pas-
senger Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the system you
are diagnosing.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D0D or B1D16 MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 100 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D0D, B1D16–MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
2. TEST FOR A SHORTED OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Connect a voltmeter between the (P67) Driver Mirror Vertical
Position Signal circuit and the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground
circuit.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Move the mirror switch to any switch position while monitoring
the voltmeter.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Connect a voltmeter between the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical
Position Signal circuit and the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor
Ground circuit
• Turn the ignition on.
• Move the mirror switch to any switch position while monitoring
the voltmeter.
What is the voltage?
4.8 to 5.2 Volts
Replace the Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with
the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Above 5.2 Volts
Go To 3
Below 4.8 Volts
Go To 4
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 101
B1D0D, B1D16–MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (P67) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OR THE (P64) PASSENGER
MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Measure the voltage of the (P67) Driver Mirror Vertical Position
Signal circuit.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Measure the voltage of the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Posi-
tion Signal circuit.
Is the voltage above 0.2 volts?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P67) Driver Mirror Vertical Position Signal cir-
cuit for a short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal
circuit for a short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 102 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D0D, B1D16–MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (P67) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OR THE (P64) PASSENGER
MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
• Measure the resistance of the (P67) Driver Mirror Vertical Posi-
tion Signal circuit between the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror
connector and the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
• Measure the resistance of the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical
Position Signal circuit between the Passenger Outside Rearview
Mirror connector and the Passenger Memory Mirror Module con-
nector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes >> Go To 5
No, Driver MMM
Repair the (P67) Driver Mirror Vertical Position Signal cir-
cuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal
circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 103
B1D0D, B1D16–MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (P69) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OR (P66) PASSENGER MIRROR
SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance of the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground
circuit between the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector and
the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance of the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor
Ground circuit between the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror
connector and the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance
with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accor-
dance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Repair the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground circuit for an
open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 104 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D0F, B1D18–MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW –
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 105
B1D0F, B1D18–MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
The (P65) Driver Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit supplies input to the Driver Memory Mirror Module.
DTC B1D0F will set if the input value is less than the known good (stored) value for more than 60 ms.
The (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit supplies input to the Passenger Memory Mirror
Module. DTC B1D18 will set if the input value is less than the known good (stored) value for more than 60 ms.
Possible Causes
FOR THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P65) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P65) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT
(P65) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P69) DRIVER MIRROR
SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
(P65) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (C910) DRIVER MIRROR
HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
FOR THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z908) GROUND
CIRCUIT
(P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P66) PASSENGER
MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
(P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (C917) PASSENGER
MIRROR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: This procedure addresses the Driver Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components and the Pas-
senger Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the system you
are diagnosing.
8N - 106 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D0F, B1D18–MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MOD-
ULE (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D0F or B1D18 MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
2. TEST FOR A SHORTED OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
• Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
• Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D0F or B1D18 MIRROR HORI-
ZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 107
B1D0F, B1D18–MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MOD-
ULE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (P65) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OR THE (P68)
PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
• Measure the resistance between ground and the (P65) Driver
Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit in the Driver Memory Mir-
ror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
• Measure the resistance between ground and the (P68) Passen-
ger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit in the Passenger
Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P65) Driver Mirror Horizontal Position Signal
circuit for a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Sig-
nal circuit for a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 4
8N - 108 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D0F, B1D18–MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MOD-
ULE (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (P65) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE
(Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL
CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z908) GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P65) Driver Mirror Horizon-
tal Position Signal circuit and the (Z911) Ground circuit in the
Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P68) Passenger Mirror Hor-
izontal Position Signal circuit and the (Z908) Ground circuit in the
Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P65) Driver Mirror Horizontal Position Signal
circuit for a short to the (Z911) Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Sig-
nal circuit for a short to the (Z908) Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 5
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 109
B1D0F, B1D18–MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MOD-
ULE (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (P65) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE
(P69) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL
POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P66) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND
CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P65) Driver Mirror Horizon-
tal Position Signal circuit and the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor
Ground circuit in the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P68) Passenger Mirror Hor-
izontal Position Signal circuit and the (P66) Passenger Mirror
Sensor Ground circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror Module
connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P65) Driver Mirror Horizontal Position Signal
circuit for a short to the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground
circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Sig-
nal circuit for a short to the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor
Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 6
8N - 110 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D0F, B1D18–MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MOD-
ULE (CONTINUED)
6. CHECK THE (P65) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE
(C910) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL
POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (C917) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER GROUND
CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P65) Driver Mirror Horizon-
tal Position Signal circuit and the (C910) Driver Mirror Heater
Ground circuit in the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P68) Passenger Mirror Hor-
izontal Position Signal circuit and the (C917) Passenger Mirror
Heater Ground circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror Module
connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P65) Driver Mirror Horizontal Position Signal
circuit for a short to the (C910) Driver Mirror Heater
Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Sig-
nal circuit for a short to the (C917) Passenger Mirror
Heater Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 111
B1D04–MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE – DRIVER
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
8N - 112 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D04–MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When mirror operation is requested.
• Set Condition:
If he Driver Memory Mirror Module senses an open or a short to ground for more than 100 ms on the (P703)
Mirror Horizontal Left Switch Sense circuit, the (P76) Mirror Common Driver circuit, the (P705) Mirror Vertical
Down Switch Sense circuit, the (P704) Mirror Horizontal Right Switch Sense circuit, or the (P706) Mirror Ver-
tical Up Switch Sense circuit after receiving a request for mirror movement from the switch.
Possible Causes
(P703) MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(P703) MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P703) MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER MIRROR CIRCUIT
(P704) MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(P704) MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P704) MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER MIRROR CIRCUIT
(P705) MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(P705) MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P705) MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER MIRROR CIRCUIT
(P706) MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(P706) MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P706) MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER MIRROR CIRCUIT
(P76) MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(P76) MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P76) MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER MIRROR CIRCUIT
MIRROR SWITCH
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Press the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D04 MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. If the conditions returns, replace the switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 113
B1D04–MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
2. TEST THE MIRROR SWITCH
Turn the ignition off.
Remove the Mirror Switch in accordance with the Service Information.
Disconnect the Mirror Switch connector.
Test the Mirror Switch in all positions in accordance with the Service information. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
POWER MIRRORS/POWER MIRROR SWITCH - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
Does the switch pass the test in all positions?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Mirror Switch in accordance with the Service information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
3. CHECK THE (P703) MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT, THE (P76) MIRROR
COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT, THE (P705) MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT, THE
(P704) MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT, & THE (P706) MIRROR VERTICAL UP
SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P703) Mirror Hori-
zontal Left Switch Sense circuit, the (P76) Mirror Common Driver cir-
cuit, the (P705) Mirror Vertical Down Switch Sense circuit, the (P704)
Mirror Horizontal Right Switch Sense circuit, and the (P706) Mirror
Vertical Up Switch Sense circuit in the Driver Memory Mirror Module
C2 connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms on any of the circuits?
Yes >> Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10000.0 ohms
for a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 4
8N - 114 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D04–MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (P703) MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P703) Mirror Horizontal Left Switch
Sense circuit between the Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector
and the Mirror Switch connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (P703) Mirror Horizontal Left Switch Sense cir-
cuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 115
B1D04–MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (P76) MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P76) Mirror Common Driver circuit
between the Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector and the Mir-
ror Switch connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (P76) Mirror Common Driver circuit for an
open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 116 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D04–MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
6. CHECK THE (P705) MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P705) Mirror Vertical Down Switch
Sense circuit between the Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector
and the Mirror Switch connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes >> Go To 7
No >> Repair the (P705) Mirror Vertical Down Switch Sense cir-
cuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 117
B1D04–MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
7. CHECK THE (P704) MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P704) Mirror Horizontal Right Switch
Sense circuit between the Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector
and the Mirror Switch connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes >> Go To 8
No >> Repair the (P704) Mirror Horizontal Right Switch Sense
circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 118 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D04–MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
8. CHECK THE (P706) MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P706) Mirror Vertical Up Switch Sense
circuit between the Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector and
the Mirror Switch connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes >> Go To 9
No >> Repair the (P706) Mirror Vertical Up Switch Sense circuit
for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 119
B1D04–MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
9. CHECK THE (P703) MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P76)
MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT, THE (P705) MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT,
THE (P704) MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT, & THE (P706) MIRROR VERTICAL
UP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (P703) Mirror Horizontal Left
Switch Sense circuit and the (P76) Mirror Common Driver circuit, the
(P705) Mirror Vertical Down Switch Sense circuit, the (P704) Mirror
Horizontal Right Switch Sense circuit, and the (P706) Mirror Vertical
Up Switch Sense circuit in the Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 con-
nector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms on any of the circuits?
Yes >> Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10000.0 ohms
for a short to the (P703) Mirror Horizontal Left Switch
Sense circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 10
8N - 120 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D04–MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
10. CHECK THE (P76) MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P705) MIRROR
VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT, THE (P704) MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH
SENSE CIRCUIT, & THE (P706) MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (P76) Mirror Common Driver cir-
cuit and the (P705) Mirror Vertical Down Switch Sense circuit, the
(P704) Mirror Horizontal Right Switch Sense circuit, and the (P706)
Mirror Vertical Up Switch Sense circuit in the Driver Memory Mirror
Module C2 connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms on any of the circuits?
Yes >> Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10000.0 ohms
for a short to the (P76) Mirror Common Driver circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 11
11. CHECK THE (P705) MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE
(P704) MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT, & THE (P706) MIRROR VERTICAL UP
SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (P705) Mirror Vertical Down
Switch Sense circuit and the (P704) Mirror Horizontal Right Switch
Sense circuit, and the (P706) Mirror Vertical Up Switch Sense circuit in
the Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms on any of the circuits?
Yes >> Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10000.0 ohms
for a short to the (P705) Mirror Vertical Down Switch
Sense circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 12
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 121
B1D04–MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
12. CHECK THE (P704) MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE
(P706) MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (P704) Mirror Horizontal Right
Switch Sense circuit and the (P706) Mirror Vertical Up Switch Sense
circuit in the Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (P704) Mirror Horizontal Right Switch Sense
circuit for a short to the (P706) Mirror Vertical Up Switch
Sense circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance
with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 122 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D07–MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK – DRIVER MEMORY
MIRROR MODULE
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 123
B1D07–MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When mirror operation is requested.
• Set Condition:
If the Driver Memory Mirror Module detects that the Mirror Switch is stuck in the same position for more than
30 seconds.
Possible Causes
MIRROR SWITCH
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY IF DTC B1D04 MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE IS ACTIVE
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Press the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D04 MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC. Refer to the Table of Contents in this section for a complete list of Power
Mirror System DTCs.
No >> Go To 2
2. TEST THE MIRROR SWITCH
Turn the ignition off.
Remove the Mirror Switch in accordance with the Service Information.
Disconnect the Mirror Switch connector.
Test the Mirror Switch in all positions in accordance with the Service information. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
POWER MIRRORS/POWER MIRROR SWITCH - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
Does the switch pass the test in all positions?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Mirror Switch in accordance with the Service information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 124 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D07–MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. VERIFY THAT DTC B1D07 MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK IS STILL ACTIVE
Turn the ignition off.
Reconnect the Mirror Switch connector.
Reinstall the Mirror Switch in accordance with the Service Information.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
Press the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D07 MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK?
Yes >> Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. If the conditions returns, replace the switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 125
B1D09, B1D12–MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW –
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
8N - 126 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D09, B1D12–MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
DTC B1D09 – If the Driver Memory Mirror Module senses voltage is less than 4.3 volts for more than 30 ms
on the (P669) Driver Mirror Sensor Supply circuit.
DTC B1D12 – If the Passenger Memory Mirror Module senses voltage is less than 4.3 volts for more than 30
ms on the (P666) Passenger Mirror Sensor Supply circuit.
Possible Causes
FOR THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P669) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P669) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT
(P669) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P69) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR
GROUND CIRCUIT
(P669) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (C910) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER
GROUND CIRCUIT
DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
FOR THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P666) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P666) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z908) GROUND CIRCUIT
(P666) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P66) PASSENGER MIRROR
SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
(P666) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (C917) PASSENGER MIRROR
HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: This procedure addresses the Driver Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components and the Pas-
senger Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the system you
are diagnosing.
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 127
B1D09, B1D12–MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D09 or B1D12 MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
2. TEST FOR A SHORTED OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Measure the voltage between the (P669) Driver Mirror Sensor
Supply circuit and the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground circuit.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Measure the voltage between the (P666) Passenger Mirror Sen-
sor Supply circuit and the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground
circuit.
Is the voltage above 4.6 volts?
Yes >> Replace the Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with
the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 3
8N - 128 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D09, B1D12–MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (P669) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OR THE (P666) PASSENGER MIRROR
SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
• Measure the resistance between ground and the (P669) Driver
Mirror Sensor Supply circuit in the Driver Memory Mirror Module
C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
• Measure the resistance between ground and the (P666) Passen-
ger Mirror Sensor Supply circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror
Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P669) Driver Mirror Sensor Supply circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P666) Passenger Mirror Sensor Supply circuit
for a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 4
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 129
B1D09, B1D12–MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (P669) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z911) GROUND
CIRCUIT OR THE (P666) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z908)
GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P669) Driver Mirror Sensor
Supply circuit and the (Z911) Ground circuit in the Driver Memory
Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P666) Passenger Mirror
Sensor Supply circuit and the (Z908) Ground circuit in the Pas-
senger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P669) Driver Mirror Sensor Supply circuit for a
short to the (Z911) Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P666) Passenger Mirror Sensor Supply circuit
for a short to the (Z908) Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 5
8N - 130 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D09, B1D12–MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (P669) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P69) DRIVER
MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (P666) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO THE (P66) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P669) Driver Mirror Sensor
Supply circuit and the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground circuit
in the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P666) Passenger Mirror
Sensor Supply circuit and the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor
Ground circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connec-
tor.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P669) Driver Mirror Sensor Supply circuit for a
short to the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P666) Passenger Mirror Sensor Supply circuit
for a short to the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground
circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 6
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 131
B1D09, B1D12–MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
6. CHECK THE (P669) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (C910) DRIVER
MIRROR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (P666) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO THE (C917) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P669) Driver Mirror Sensor
Supply circuit and the (C910) Driver Mirror Heater Ground circuit
in the Driver Memory Mirror Module connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P666) Passenger Mirror
Sensor Supply circuit and the (C917) Passenger Mirror Heater
Ground circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connec-
tor.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P669) Driver Mirror Sensor Supply circuit for a
short to the (C910) Driver Mirror Heater Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P666) Passenger Mirror Sensor Supply circuit
for a short to the (C917) Passenger Mirror Heater Ground
circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 132 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D1B, B1D27–MIRROR MOTOR COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY
MIRROR MODULE
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 133
B1D1B, B1D27–MIRROR MOTOR COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When the Mirror Common Driver Output is turned on.
• Set Condition:
DTC B1D1B – If the Driver Memory Mirror Module senses an excessive current draw on the (P73) Driver
Mirror Common Driver circuit within 10 ms of turning on the Mirror Common Driver Output.
DTC B1D27 – If the Passenger Memory Mirror Module senses an excessive current draw on the (P70) Pas-
senger Mirror Common Driver circuit within 10 ms of turning on the Mirror Common Driver Output.
Possible Causes
FOR THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P73) DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P73) DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT
(P73) DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P69) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR
GROUND CIRCUIT
(P73) DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (C910) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER
GROUND CIRCUIT
DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
FOR THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P70) PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P70) PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z908) GROUND CIRCUIT
(P70) PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P66) PASSENGER MIRROR
SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
(P70) PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (C917) PASSENGER MIRROR
HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: This procedure addresses the Driver Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components and the Pas-
senger Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the system you
are diagnosing.
8N - 134 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D1B, B1D27–MIRROR MOTOR COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D1B or B1D27 MIRROR MOTOR COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
2. TEST FOR A SHORTED OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
• Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
• Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D1B or B1D27 MIRROR
MOTOR COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 135
B1D1B, B1D27–MIRROR MOTOR COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (P73) DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT OR THE (P70) PASSENGER MIRROR
COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
• Measure the resistance between ground and the (P73) Driver
Mirror Common Driver circuit in the Driver Memory Mirror Module
C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
• Measure the resistance between ground and the (P70) Passen-
ger Mirror Common Driver circuit in the Passenger Memory Mir-
ror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P73) Driver Mirror Common Driver circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P70) Passenger Mirror Common Driver circuit
for a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 4
8N - 136 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D1B, B1D27–MIRROR MOTOR COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (P73) DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z911) GROUND
CIRCUIT OR THE (P70) PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z908)
GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P73) Driver Mirror Common
Driver circuit and the (Z911) Ground circuit in the Driver Memory
Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P70) Passenger Mirror
Common Driver circuit and the (Z908) Ground circuit in the Pas-
senger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P73) Driver Mirror Common Driver circuit for a
short to the (Z911) Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P70) Passenger Mirror Common Driver circuit
for a short to the (Z908) Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 5
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 137
B1D1B, B1D27–MIRROR MOTOR COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (P73) DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P69) DRIVER
MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (P70) PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO THE (P66) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P73) Driver Mirror Common
Driver circuit and the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground circuit in
the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P70) Passenger Mirror
Common Driver circuit and the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor
Ground circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connec-
tor.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P73) Driver Mirror Common Driver circuit for a
short to the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P70) Passenger Mirror Common Driver circuit
for a short to the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground
circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 6
8N - 138 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D1B, B1D27–MIRROR MOTOR COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
6. CHECK THE (P73) DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (C910) DRIVER
MIRROR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (P70) PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO THE (C917) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P73) Driver Mirror Common
Driver circuit and the (C910) Driver Mirror Heater Ground circuit
in the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P70) Passenger Mirror
Common Driver circuit and the (C917) Passenger Mirror Heater
Ground circuit in the Passenger Driver Memory Mirror Module
connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P73) Driver Mirror Common Driver circuit for a
short to the (C910) Driver Mirror Heater Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P70) Passenger Mirror Common Driver circuit
for a short to the (C917) Passenger Mirror Heater Ground
circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 139
B1D1C, B1D28–MIRROR MOTOR COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE
8N - 140 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D1C, B1D28–MIRROR MOTOR COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When the Mirror Common Driver Output is turned on.
• Set Condition:
DTC B1D1C – If the Driver Memory Mirror Module senses voltage on the (P73) Driver Mirror Common Driver
circuit within 10 ms of turning on the Mirror Common Driver Output.
DTC B1D28 – If the Passenger Memory Mirror Module senses voltage on the (P70) Passenger Mirror Com-
mon Driver circuit within 10 ms of turning on the Mirror Common Driver Output.
Possible Causes
FOR THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P73) DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
FOR THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P70) PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: This procedure addresses the Driver Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components and the Pas-
senger Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the system you
are diagnosing.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D1C or B1D28 MIRROR MOTOR COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 141
B1D1C, B1D28–MIRROR MOTOR COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
2. TEST FOR A SHORTED OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
• Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
• Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D1C or B1D28 MIRROR
MOTOR COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 142 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D1C, B1D28–MIRROR MOTOR COMMON CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (P73) DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT OR THE (P70) PASSENGER MIRROR
COMMON DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the voltage of the (P73) Driver Mirror Common Driver
circuit.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the voltage of the (P70) Passenger Mirror Common
Driver circuit.
Is the voltage above 0.2 volts?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P73) Driver Mirror Common Driver circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P70) Passenger Mirror Common Driver circuit
for a short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance
with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 143
B1D1F, B1D2B–MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY
MIRROR MODULE
8N - 144 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D1F, B1D2B–MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When the Mirror Vertical Driver Output is turned on.
• Set Condition:
DTC B1D1F – If the Driver Memory Mirror Module senses an excessive current draw on the (P71) Driver Mir-
ror Vertical Driver circuit within 10 ms of turning on the Mirror Vertical Driver Output.
DTC B1D2B – If the Passenger Memory Mirror Module senses an excessive current draw on the (P72) Pas-
senger Mirror Vertical Driver circuit within 10 ms of turning on the Mirror Vertical Driver Output.
Possible Causes
FOR THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P71) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P71) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT
(P71) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P69) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR
GROUND CIRCUIT
(P71) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (C910) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER
GROUND CIRCUIT
DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
FOR THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P72) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P72) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z908) GROUND CIRCUIT
(P72) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P66) PASSENGER MIRROR
SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
(P72) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (C917) PASSENGER MIRROR
HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: This procedure addresses the Driver Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components and the Pas-
senger Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the system you
are diagnosing.
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 145
B1D1F, B1D2B–MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D1F or B1D2B MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
2. TEST FOR A SHORTED OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
• Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
• Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D1F or B1D2B MIRROR VER-
TICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 146 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D1F, B1D2B–MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (P71) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT OR THE (P72) PASSENGER MIRROR
VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
• Measure the resistance between ground and the (P71) Driver
Mirror Vertical Driver circuit in the Driver Memory Mirror Module
C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
• Measure the resistance between ground and the (P72) Passen-
ger Mirror Vertical Driver circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror
Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P71) Driver Mirror Vertical Driver circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P72) Passenger Mirror Vertical Driver circuit
for a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 4
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 147
B1D1F, B1D2B–MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (P71) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z911)
GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (P72) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
THE (Z908) GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P71) Driver Mirror Vertical
Driver circuit and the (Z911) Ground circuit in the Driver Memory
Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P72) Passenger Mirror Ver-
tical Driver circuit and the (Z908) Ground circuit in the Passenger
Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P71) Driver Mirror Vertical Driver circuit for a
short to the (Z911) Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P72) Passenger Mirror Vertical Driver circuit
for a short to the (Z908) Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 5
8N - 148 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D1F, B1D2B–MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (P71) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P69) DRIVER
MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (P72) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO THE (P66) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P71) Driver Mirror Vertical
Driver circuit and the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground circuit in
the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P72) Passenger Mirror Ver-
tical Driver circuit and the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground
circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P71) Driver Mirror Vertical Driver circuit for a
short to the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P72) Passenger Mirror Vertical Driver circuit
for a short to the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground
circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 6
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 149
B1D1F, B1D2B–MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
6. CHECK THE (P71) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (C910) DRIVER
MIRROR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (P72) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO THE (C917) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P71) Driver Mirror Vertical
Driver circuit and the (C910) Driver Mirror Heater Ground circuit
in the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P72) Passenger Mirror Ver-
tical Driver circuit and the (C917) Passenger Mirror Heater
Ground circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connec-
tor.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P71) Driver Mirror Vertical Driver circuit for a
short to the (C910) Driver Mirror Heater Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P72) Passenger Mirror Vertical Driver circuit
for a short to the (C917) Passenger Mirror Heater Ground
circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 150 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D10, B1D19–MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH –
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 151
B1D10, B1D19–MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
The (P65) Driver Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit supplies input to the Driver Memory Mirror Module.
DTC B1D10 will set if the input value is greater than the known good (stored) value for more than 60 ms.
The (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit supplies input to the Passenger Memory Mirror
Module. DTC B1D19 will set if the input value is greater than the known good (stored) value for more than 60
ms.
Possible Causes
FOR THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P65) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(P65) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(P69) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
FOR THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(P66) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: This procedure addresses the Driver Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components and the Pas-
senger Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the system you
are diagnosing.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D10 or B1D19 MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 152 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D10, B1D19–MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
2. TEST FOR A SHORTED OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Connect a voltmeter between the (P65) Driver Mirror Horizontal
Position Signal circuit and the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground
circuit.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Move the mirror switch to any switch position while monitoring
the voltmeter.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Connect a voltmeter between the (P68) Passenger Mirror Hori-
zontal Position Signal circuit and the (P66) Passenger Mirror
Sensor Ground circuit
• Turn the ignition on.
• Move the mirror switch to any switch position while monitoring
the voltmeter.
What is the voltage?
4.8 to 5.2 Volts
Replace the Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with
the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Above 5.2 Volts
Go To 3
Below 4.8 Volts
Go To 4
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 153
B1D10, B1D19–MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (P65) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OR THE (P68)
PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Measure the voltage of the (P65) Driver Mirror Horizontal Posi-
tion Signal circuit.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Measure the voltage of the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal
Position Signal circuit.
Is the voltage above 0.2 volts?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P65) Driver Mirror Horizontal Position Signal
circuit for a short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Sig-
nal circuit for a short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 154 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D10, B1D19–MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (P65) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OR THE (P68)
PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
• Measure the resistance of the (P65) Driver Mirror Horizontal
Position Signal circuit between the Driver Outside Rearview Mir-
ror connector and the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connec-
tor.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
• Measure the resistance of the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal
Position Signal circuit between the Passenger Outside Rearview
Mirror connector and the Passenger Memory Mirror Module con-
nector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes >> Go To 5
No, Driver MMM
Repair the (P65) Driver Mirror Horizontal Position Signal
circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 155
B1D10, B1D19–MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (P69) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OR (P66) PASSENGER MIRROR
SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance of the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground
circuit between the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector and
the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance of the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor
Ground circuit between the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror
connector and the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance
with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accor-
dance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Repair the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground circuit for an
open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 156 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D20, B1D2C–MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY
MIRROR MODULE
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 157
B1D20, B1D2C–MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When the Mirror Vertical Driver Output is turned on.
• Set Condition:
DTC B1D20 – If the Driver Memory Mirror Module senses voltage on the (P71) Driver Mirror Vertical Driver
circuit within 10 ms of turning on the Mirror Vertical Driver Output.
DTC B1D2C – If the Passenger Memory Mirror Module senses voltage on the (P72) Passenger Mirror Vertical
Driver circuit within 10 ms of turning on the Mirror Vertical Driver Output.
Possible Causes
FOR THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P71) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
FOR THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P72) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: This procedure addresses the Driver Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components and the Pas-
senger Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the system you
are diagnosing.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D20 or B1D2C MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 158 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D20, B1D2C–MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
2. TEST FOR A SHORTED OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
• Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
• Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D20 or B1D2C MIRROR VER-
TICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 159
B1D20, B1D2C–MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (P71) DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT OR THE (P72) PASSENGER MIRROR
VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the voltage of the (P71) Driver Mirror Vertical Driver cir-
cuit.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the voltage of the (P72) Passenger Mirror Vertical
Driver circuit.
Is the voltage above 0.2 volts?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P71) Driver Mirror Vertical Driver circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P72) Passenger Mirror Vertical Driver circuit
for a short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance
with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 160 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D23, B1D2F–MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW –
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 161
B1D23, B1D2F–MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When the Mirror Horizontal Driver Output is turned on.
• Set Condition:
DTC B1D23 – If the Driver Memory Mirror Module senses an excessive current draw on the (P75) Driver Mir-
ror Horizontal Driver circuit within 10 ms of turning on the Mirror Horizontal Driver Output.
DTC B1D2F – If the Passenger Memory Mirror Module senses an excessive current draw on the (P74) Pas-
senger Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit within 10 ms of turning on the Mirror Horizontal Driver Output.
Possible Causes
FOR THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P75) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P75) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT
(P75) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P69) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR
GROUND CIRCUIT
(P75) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (C910) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER
GROUND CIRCUIT
DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
FOR THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P74) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P74) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z908) GROUND CIRCUIT
(P74) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P66) PASSENGER MIRROR
SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
(P74) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (C917) PASSENGER MIRROR
HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: This procedure addresses the Driver Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components and the Pas-
senger Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the system you
are diagnosing.
8N - 162 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D23, B1D2F–MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MOD-
ULE (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D23 or B1D2F MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
2. TEST FOR A SHORTED OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
• Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
• Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D23 or B1D2F MIRROR HORI-
ZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 163
B1D23, B1D2F–MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MOD-
ULE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (P75) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT OR THE (P74) PASSENGER
MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
• Measure the resistance between ground and the (P75) Driver
Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit in the Driver Memory Mirror Mod-
ule C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
• Measure the resistance between ground and the (P74) Passen-
ger Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit in the Passenger Memory Mir-
ror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P75) Driver Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit for
a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P74) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit
for a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 4
8N - 164 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D23, B1D2F–MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MOD-
ULE (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (P75) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z911)
GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (P74) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT
TO THE (Z908) GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P75) Driver Mirror Horizon-
tal Driver circuit and the (Z911) Ground circuit in the Driver Mem-
ory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P74) Passenger Mirror Hor-
izontal Driver circuit and the (Z908) Ground circuit in the Passen-
ger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P75) Driver Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit for
a short to the (Z911) Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P74) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit
for a short to the (Z908) Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 5
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 165
B1D23, B1D2F–MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MOD-
ULE (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (P75) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P69)
DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (P74) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL
DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P66) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P75) Driver Mirror Horizon-
tal Driver circuit and the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground cir-
cuit in the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P74) Passenger Mirror Hor-
izontal Driver circuit and the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor
Ground circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connec-
tor.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P75) Driver Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit for
a short to the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P74) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit
for a short to the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground
circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 6
8N - 166 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D23, B1D2F–MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MOD-
ULE (CONTINUED)
6. CHECK THE (P75) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (C910)
DRIVER MIRROR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (P74) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL
DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (C917) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P75) Driver Mirror Horizon-
tal Driver circuit and the (C910) Driver Mirror Heater Ground cir-
cuit in the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (P74) Passenger Mirror Hor-
izontal Driver circuit and the (C917) Passenger Mirror Heater
Ground circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connec-
tor.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P75) Driver Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit for
a short to the (C910) Driver Mirror Heater Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P74) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit
for a short to the (C917) Passenger Mirror Heater Ground
circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 167
B1D24, B1D30–MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH –
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
8N - 168 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D24, B1D30–MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When the Mirror Horizontal Driver Output is turned on.
• Set Condition:
DTC B1D24 – If the Driver Memory Mirror Module senses voltage on the (P75) Driver Mirror Horizontal Driver
circuit within 10 ms of turning on the Mirror Horizontal Driver Output.
DTC B1D30 – If the Passenger Memory Mirror Module senses voltage on the (P74) Passenger Mirror Hori-
zontal Driver circuit within 10 ms of turning on the Mirror Horizontal Driver Output.
Possible Causes
FOR THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P75) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
FOR THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(P74) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: This procedure addresses the Driver Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components and the Pas-
senger Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the system you
are diagnosing.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D24 or B1D30 MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 169
B1D24, B1D30–MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
2. TEST FOR A SHORTED OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
• Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
• Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D24 or B1D30 MIRROR HORI-
ZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 170 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D24, B1D30–MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (P75) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT OR THE (P74) PASSENGER
MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the voltage of the (P75) Driver Mirror Horizontal Driver
circuit.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the voltage of the (P74) Passenger Mirror Horizontal
Driver circuit.
Is the voltage above 0.2 volts?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (P75) Driver Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit for
a short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (P74) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit
for a short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance
with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 171
B1D33, B1D37–MIRROR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE
8N - 172 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D33, B1D37–MIRROR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When the Mirror Heater Driver Output is turned on.
• Set Condition:
DTC B1D33 – If the Driver Memory Mirror Module senses an excessive current draw on the (C110) Driver
Mirror Heater Driver circuit within 10 ms of turning on the Mirror Heater Driver Output.
DTC B1D37 – If the Passenger Memory Mirror Module senses an excessive current draw on the (C16) Pas-
senger Mirror Heater Driver circuit within 10 ms of turning on the Mirror Heater Driver Output.
Possible Causes
FOR THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(C110) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(C110) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT
(C110) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P69) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR
GROUND CIRCUIT
(C110) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (C910) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER
GROUND CIRCUIT
DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
FOR THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(C16) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(C16) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z908) GROUND CIRCUIT
(C16) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P66) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR
GROUND CIRCUIT
(C16) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (C917) PASSENGER MIRROR
HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: This procedure addresses the Driver Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components and the Pas-
senger Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the system you
are diagnosing.
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 173
B1D33, B1D37–MIRROR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
Verify that the Rear Window Defogger (EBL) mode switch is off (EBL status indicator not illuminated).
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Press the Rear Window Defogger (EBL) mode switch on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D33 or B1D37 MIRROR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
2. TEST FOR A SHORTED OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Press the Rear Window Defogger (EBL) mode switch off.
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Press the Rear Window Defogger (EBL) mode switch on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Press the Rear Window Defogger (EBL) mode switch off.
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
• Press the Rear Window Defogger (EBL) mode switch on.
• With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D33 or B1D37 MIRROR
HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 174 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D33, B1D37–MIRROR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (C110) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT OR THE (C16) PASSENGER MIRROR
HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
• Measure the resistance between ground and the (C110) Driver
Mirror Heater Driver circuit in the Driver Memory Mirror Module
C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
• Measure the resistance between ground and the (C16) Passen-
ger Mirror Heater Driver circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror
Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (C110) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (C16) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit for
a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 4
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 175
B1D33, B1D37–MIRROR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (C110) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z911) GROUND
CIRCUIT OR THE (C16) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z908)
GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (C110) Driver Mirror Heater
Driver circuit and the (Z911) Ground circuit in the Driver Memory
Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (C16) Passenger Mirror
Heater Driver circuit and the (Z908) Ground circuit in the Passen-
ger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (C110) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit for a
short to the (Z911) Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (C16) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit for
a short to the (Z908) Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 5
8N - 176 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D33, B1D37–MIRROR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (C110) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P69) DRIVER
MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (C16) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO THE (P66) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (C110) Driver Mirror Heater
Driver circuit and the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground circuit in
the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (C16) Passenger Mirror
Heater Driver circuit and the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor
Ground circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connec-
tor.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (C110) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit for a
short to the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (C16) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit for
a short to the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground cir-
cuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 6
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 177
B1D33, B1D37–MIRROR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
6. CHECK THE (C110) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (C910) DRIVER
MIRROR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (C16) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO THE (C917) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (C110) Driver Mirror Heater
Driver circuit and the (C910) Driver Mirror Heater Ground circuit
in the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between the (C16) Passenger Mirror
Heater Driver circuit and the (C917) Passenger Mirror Heater
Ground circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connec-
tor.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Repair the (C110) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit for a
short to the (C910) Driver Mirror Heater Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Repair the (C16) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit for
a short to the (C917) Passenger Mirror Heater Ground cir-
cuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 178 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D35, B1D39–MIRROR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN – MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 179
B1D35, B1D39–MIRROR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When the Mirror Heater Driver Output is turned on.
• Set Condition:
DTC B1D35 – If the Driver Memory Mirror Module senses voltage on the (C110) Driver Mirror Heater Driver
circuit within 10 ms of turning on the Mirror Heater Driver Output.
DTC B1D39 – If the Passenger Memory Mirror Module senses voltage on the (C16) Passenger Mirror Heater
Driver circuit within 10 ms of turning on the Mirror Heater Driver Output.
Possible Causes
FOR THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(C110) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN
(C910) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR OPEN
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
FOR THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
(C16) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN
(C917) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR OPEN
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: This procedure addresses the Driver Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components and the Pas-
senger Memory Mirror system’s circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the system you
are diagnosing.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
Verify that the Rear Window Defogger (EBL) mode switch is off (EBL status indicator not illuminated).
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on.
Press the Rear Window Defogger (EBL) mode switch on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D35 or B1D39 MIRROR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 180 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D35, B1D39–MIRROR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
2. TEST FOR AN OPEN OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Press the Rear Window Defogger (EBL) mode switch off.
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Connect a 12-volt test light between the (C110) Driver Mirror
Heater Driver circuit and the (C910) Driver Mirror Heater Ground
circuit.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Press the Rear Window Defogger (EBL) mode switch on.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Press the Rear Window Defogger (EBL) mode switch off.
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror connector.
• Connect a 12-volt test light between the (C16) Passenger Mirror
Heater Driver circuit and the (C917) Passenger Mirror Heater
Ground circuit.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Press the Rear Window Defogger (EBL) mode switch on.
Does the test light illuminate brightly?
Yes >> Replace the Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with
the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 3
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 181
B1D35, B1D39–MIRROR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (C110) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT OR THE (C16) PASSENGER MIRROR
HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
• Measure the resistance of the (C110) Driver Mirror Heater Driver
circuit between the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector and
the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
• Measure the resistance of the (C16) Passenger Mirror Heater
Driver circuit between the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror
connector and the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes >> Go To 4
No, Driver MMM
Repair the (C110) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit for an
open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Repair the (C16) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit for
an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 182 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D35, B1D39–MIRROR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (C910) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT OR THE (C917) PASSENGER MIRROR
HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance of the (C910) Driver Mirror Heater
Ground circuit between the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror con-
nector and the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance of the (C917) Passenger Mirror Heater
Ground circuit between the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror
connector and the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance
with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accor-
dance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Repair the (C910) Driver Mirror Heater Ground circuit for
an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Repair the (C917) Passenger Mirror Heater Ground circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 183
B1D4C–MEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE
8N - 184 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D4C–MEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
If the Driver Memory Mirror Module senses voltage is greater than 5.25 volts for more than 60 ms on the
(P439) Memory Select Switch Mux circuit or the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit.
Possible Causes
(P439) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
DRIVER WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Press the Memory Set Switch several time in all positions.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D4C MEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
2. CHECK THE DRIVER WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch C1 connector.
Cycle the ignition 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D4C MEMORY SWITCH INPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch in accor-
dance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 185
B1D4C–MEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
Turn the ignition on.
Measure the voltage of the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch Mux cir-
cuit.
Is the voltage above 0.2 volts?
Yes >> Repair the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit for
a short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (P439) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector.
Turn the ignition on.
Measure the voltage of the (P439) Memory Select Switch Mux circuit.
Is the voltage above 0.2 volts?
Yes >> Repair the (P439) Memory Select Switch Mux circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance
with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 186 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D4D–MEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 187
B1D4D–MEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
If the Driver Memory Mirror Module either receives a conflicting input from the (P439) Memory Select Switch
Mux circuit or the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit or the module senses voltage is less than 0.2
volts on the (P439) Memory Select Switch Mux circuit or the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit.
Possible Causes
(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT
(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (G775) DRIVER DOOR LOCK
SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT
(P439) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(P439) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (G920) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH
RETURN CIRCUIT
DRIVER WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH
MEMORY SET SWITCH
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Press the Memory Set Switch several times in all positions.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D4D MEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 188 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D4D–MEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK THE DRIVER WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch C1 connector.
Cycle the ignition 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D4D MEMORY SWITCH INPUT
CIRCUIT STUCK?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch in accor-
dance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
3. CHECK THE MEMORY SET SWITCH FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Memory Set Switch connector.
Cycle the ignition 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D4D MEMORY SWITCH INPUT
CIRCUIT STUCK?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Replace the Memory Set Switch in accordance with the
Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 189
B1D4D–MEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
4. CHECK THE (G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G161) Driver Door
Lock Switch Mux circuit in the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 con-
nector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit for
a short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go to 5
5. CHECK THE (G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z911)
GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch
Mux circuit and the (Z911) Ground circuit in the Driver Memory Mirror
Module C1 connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit for
a short to the (Z911) Ground circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 6
8N - 190 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D4D–MEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
6. CHECK THE (G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (G775) DRIVER
DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch
Mux circuit and the (G775) Driver Door Lock Switch Return circuit in
the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit for
a short to the (G775) Driver Door Lock Switch Return cir-
cuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 7
7. CHECK THE (P439) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P439) Memory
Select Switch Mux circuit in the Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 con-
nector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (P439) Memory Select Switch Mux circuit for a
short to ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Go To 8
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 191
B1D4D–MEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
8. CHECK THE (P439) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (G920) MEMORY
SELECT SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (P439) Memory Select Switch
Mux circuit and the (G920) Memory Select Switch Return circuit in the
Driver Memory Mirror Module C2 connector.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (P439) Memory Select Switch Mux circuit for a
short to the (G920) Memory Select Switch return circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance
with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 192 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D53–SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW — DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR
MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
If the Driver Memory Mirror Module detects an internal module failure.
Possible Causes
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. REPLACE THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Repair
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 193
B210D–BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
If the Driver / Passenger Memory Mirror Module senses voltage is less than 8.5 volts on the (A931) Fused
B(+) circuit.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
FOR THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
BATTERY / CHARGING SYSTEM
(A931) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT SHORTED
(A931) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN
(Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT(S) OPEN
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
FOR THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
BATTERY / CHARGING SYSTEM
(A931) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT SHORTED
(A931) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN
(Z908) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: Since this DTC can set in the Driver Door Module (DDM) and in the Passenger Door Module (PDM)
this procedure addresses both systems’ circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the sys-
tem you are diagnosing.
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ENGINE DTCs
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read engine DTCs.
Does the scan tool display any BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW related DTCs?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure(s).
No >> Go To 2
8N - 194 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B210D–BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
2. VERIFY THAT THE DRIVER DOOR MODULE (DDM) OR PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (PDM) IS ACTIVE
ON THE BUS
NOTE: Ensure that the IOD fuse is installed and that battery voltage is between 10.0 and 16.0 volts.
With the scan tool, select ECU view.
NOTE: A red X will display next to the module that is not communicating, indicating that the module is not
active on the Bus network. A green check indicates that the module is active on the Bus network.
Does the scan tool display a red X next to the Driver or Passenger Door Module (DDM or PDM)?
Yes >> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for No
Response diagnostic test procedures.
No >> Go To 3
3. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs
Start the engine and run for 2 minutes.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B210D BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
4. CHECK FOR POWER ON THE (A931) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT AT THE DRIVER OR PASSENGER MEMORY
MIRROR MODULE
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Measure the voltage of the (A931) Fused B(+) circuit.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Measure the voltage of the (A931) Fused B(+) circuit.
Is the voltage above 8.5 volts?
Yes >> Go To 5
No >> Repair the (A931) Fused B(+) circuit for an open or short.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 195
B210D–BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (Z911) OR THE (Z908) GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between ground and both of the (Z911) ground circuits in the Driver Memory Mirror
Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Measure the resistance between ground and the (Z908) ground circuit in the Passenger Memory Mirror Module
connector.
It the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Driver MMM
Repair the (Z911) ground circuit(s) for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No, Passenger MMM
Repair the (Z908) ground circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 196 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B210E–BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
If the Driver / Passenger Memory Mirror Module senses voltage is greater than 16.9 volts on the (A931) Fused
B(+) circuit.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
BATTERY / CHARGING SYSTEM
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: Since this DTC can set in the Driver Door Module (DDM) and in the Passenger Door Module (PDM)
this procedure addresses both systems’ circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the sys-
tem you are diagnosing.
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ENGINE DTCs
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read engine DTCs.
Does the scan tool display any BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH related DTCs?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure(s).
No >> If DTC B210E BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH set in the Driver Door Module (DDM), Go To 2. If DTC B210E
BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH set in the Passenger Door Module (PDM), Go To 3
2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION – DDM
With the scan tool, erase DTCs
Start the engine and run for 2 minutes.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read Driver Door Module (DDM) DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B210E–BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH?
Yes >> Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 197
B210E–BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH – MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION – PDM
With the scan tool, erase DTCs
Start the engine and run for 2 minutes.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read Passenger Door Module (PDM) DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B210E–BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH?
Yes >> Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 198 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B2218–DOOR MODULE INTERNAL – DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
At wake up or power up.
• Set Condition:
If the Driver Memory Mirror Module detects a RAM, ROM, or Checksum failure.
Possible Causes
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. REPLACE THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Repair
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 199
B2219–DOOR MODULE INTERNAL – PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
At wake up or power up.
• Set Condition:
If the Passenger Memory Mirror Module detects a RAM, ROM, or Checksum failure.
Possible Causes
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. REPLACE THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
Repair
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
8N - 200 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
U0141–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0151–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER
(ORC)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0154–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0155–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0156–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0159–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 201
U0164–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC CONTROL MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0167–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER CONTROL
MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0168–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE
(SKREEM/WCM)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0169–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0184–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RADIO
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0186–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUDIO AMPLIFIER
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
8N - 202 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
U0195–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SDARS
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0196–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL
MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0197–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HANDS FREE PHONE MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0199–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DRIVER DOOR MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0200–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PASSENGER DOOR MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0208–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 203
U0209–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0212–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SCCM - CAN-B
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0231–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RAIN SENSING MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0241–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUTO HIGHBEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL
MODULE
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
8N - 204 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
U1000–CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT– MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 205
U1000–CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT– MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
With the ignition in the run position.
• Set Condition:
If the Driver / Passenger Memory Mirror Module senses that the (D55) Can B Bus (+) circuit is either open, or
shorted to voltage, or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
FOR THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
ACTIVE CAN B BUS DTCs IN FRONT CONTROL MODULE (FCM)
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN TO DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
FOR THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
ACTIVE CAN B BUS DTCs IN FRONT CONTROL MODULE (FCM)
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN TO PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: Since this DTC can set in the Driver Door Module (DDM) and in the Passenger Door Module (PDM)
this procedure addresses both systems’ circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the sys-
tem you are diagnosing.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: U1000 CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
2. CHECK FOR ACTIVE CAN B BUS RELATED DTCS IN THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE (FCM)
With the scan tool, read Front Control Module (FCM) DTCs
Does the scan tool display any active CAN B BUS related DTCs?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
No >> Go To 3
8N - 206 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
U1000–CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT– MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE
& THE DRIVER / PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
• Disconnect the Front Control Module C1 connector.
• Measure the resistance of the (D55) Can B Bus (+) circuit
between the Front Control Module C1 connector and the Driver
Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
• Disconnect the Front Control Module C1 connector.
• Measure the resistance of the (D55) Can B Bus (+) circuit
between the Front Control Module C1 connector and the Passen-
ger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance
with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accor-
dance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Repair the (D55) Can B Bus (+) circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 207
U1001–CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT– MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
8N - 208 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
U1001–CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT– MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Memory Mirror System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS - SCHEMAT-
ICS AND DIAGRAMS).
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
With the ignition in the run position.
• Set Condition:
If the Driver / Passenger Memory Mirror Module senses that the (D54) Can B Bus (-) circuit is either open, or
shorted to voltage, or shorted to ground, or shorted together.
Possible Causes
FOR THE DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
ACTIVE CAN B BUS DTCs IN FRONT CONTROL MODULE (FCM)
(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN TO DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
DRIVER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
FOR THE PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR SYSTEM:
ACTIVE CAN B BUS DTCs IN FRONT CONTROL MODULE (FCM)
(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN TO PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
NOTE: Since this DTC can set in the Driver Door Module (DDM) and in the Passenger Door Module (PDM)
this procedure addresses both systems’ circuits and components. Select only that which applies to the sys-
tem you are diagnosing.
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: U1001 CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
2. CHECK FOR ACTIVE CAN B BUS RELATED DTCS IN THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE (FCM)
With the scan tool, read Front Control Module (FCM) DTCs
Does the scan tool display any active CAN B BUS related DTCs?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
No >> Go To 3
WK POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 209
U1001–CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT– MEMORY MIRROR MODULE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE &
THE DRIVER / PASSENGER MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
For the Driver Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Driver Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
• Disconnect the Front Control Module C1 connector.
• Measure the resistance of the (D54) Can B Bus (-) circuit
between the Front Control Module C1 connector and the Driver
Memory Mirror Module C1 connector.
For the Passenger Memory Mirror System, proceed as follows:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Disconnect the Passenger Memory Mirror Module connector.
• Disconnect the Front Control Module C1 connector.
• Measure the resistance of the (D54) Can B Bus (-) circuit
between the Front Control Module C1 connector and the Passen-
ger Memory Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes, Driver MMM
Replace the Driver Memory Mirror Module in accordance
with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes, Passenger MMM
Replace the Passenger Memory Mirror Module in accor-
dance with the Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No >> Repair the (D54) Can B Bus (-) circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8N - 210 POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS
POWER MEMORY MIRRORS SYSTEM
WK POWER MIRRORS-SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 211
POWER MIRRORS-SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER MIRRORS-SERVICE INFORMATION SWITCH-MIRROR
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
POWER MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 POWER MIRROR SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
MIRROR-INSIDE REARVIEW REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
AUTOMATIC DAY/NIGHT MIRROR . . . . . . . . 212
POWER MIRRORS-SERVICE INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
AUTOMATIC DAY/NIGHT MIRROR
The automatic day/night mirror system is able to automatically change the reflectance of the inside rear view mirror
in order to reduce the glare of headlamps approaching the vehicle from the rear. The automatic day/night rear view
mirror receives battery current through a fuse in the junction block only when the ignition switch is in the On posi-
tion.
OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR
The power operated rear view mirrors allow the driver to adjust both outside mirrors electrically from the driver side
front seat position by operating a switch on the driver side front door trim panel. The power mirrors receive a non-
switched battery feed through a fuse in the junction block so that the system will remain operational, regardless of
the ignition switch position.
OPERATION
AUTOMATIC DAY/NIGHT MIRROR
A switch located on the bottom of the automatic day/night mirror housing allows the vehicle operator to select
whether the automatic dimming feature is operational. When the automatic day/night mirror is turned on, the mirror
switch is lighted by an integral Light-Emitting Diode (LED). The mirror will automatically disable its self-dimming
feature whenever the vehicle is being driven in reverse.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
POWER MIRRORS
For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information.
1. Check the fuses in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) and the junction block. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK,
repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse(s).
2. Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the open circuit
to the PDC as required.
3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the driver side power window switch and bezel
assembly and unplug the wire harness connector from the power mirror switch. Connect the battery negative
cable. Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+) circuit cavity in the door wire harness half of the power mirror
switch wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the junction block as
required.
8N - 212 POWER MIRRORS-SERVICE INFORMATION WK
4. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity in the
door wire harness half of the power mirror switch wire harness connector and a good ground. There should be
continuity. If OK, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS/SIDEVIEW MIRROR - DIAGNOSIS AND TEST-
ING). If not OK, repair open in the ground circuit.
MIRROR-INSIDE REARVIEW
DESCRIPTION
The automatic day/night mirror uses a thin layer of electrochromic material between two pieces of conductive glass
to make up the face of the mirror. When the mirror switch is in the On position, two photocell sensors are used by
the mirror circuitry to monitor external light levels and adjust the reflectance of the mirror.
OPERATION
The ambient photocell sensor is located on the forward-facing (windshield side) of the rear view mirror housing, and
detects the ambient light levels outside of the vehicle. The headlamp photocell sensor is located inside the rear view
mirror housing behind the mirror glass and faces rearward, to detect the level of the light being received at the rear
window side of the mirror. When the circuitry of the automatic day/night mirror detects that the difference between
the two light levels is too great (the light level received at the rear of the mirror is much higher than that at the front
of the mirror), it begins to darken the mirror.
The automatic day/night mirror circuitry also monitors the transmission using an input from the backup lamp circuit.
The mirror circuitry is programmed to automatically disable its self-dimming feature whenever it senses that the
transmission backup lamp circuit is energized.
The automatic day/night mirror is a completely self-contained unit and cannot be repaired. If faulty or damaged, the
entire mirror assembly must be replaced.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
AUTOMATIC DAY/NIGHT MIRROR
For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information.
1. Check the fuse in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as
required and replace the faulty fuse.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the junction block. If OK, go
to Step 3. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the ignition switch as required.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Unplug the wire
harness connector from the automatic day/night mirror. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition
switch to the On position. Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch output (run/start) circuit cavity of
the automatic day/night mirror wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open circuit to
the junction block as required.
WK POWER MIRRORS-SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 213
4. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Discon-
nect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check
for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of
the automatic day/night mirror wire harness con-
nector and a good ground. There should be conti-
nuity. If OK, go to Step 5. If not OK, repair the
circuit to ground as required.
5. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the igni-
tion switch to the On position. Apply the parking
brake. Place the transmission gear selector lever in
the Reverse position. Check for battery voltage at
the backup lamp switch output circuit cavity of the
automatic day/night mirror wire harness connector.
If OK, go to Step 6. If not OK, repair the open cir-
cuit as required.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Plug in the automatic day/night
mirror wire harness connector. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the On position.
Place the transmission gear selector lever in the Neutral position. Place the mirror switch in the On (the LED in
the mirror switch is lighted) position. Cover the forward facing ambient photocell sensor to keep out any ambient
light.
NOTE: The ambient photocell sensor must be covered completely, so that no light reaches the sensor. Use
a finger pressed tightly against the sensor, or cover the sensor completely with electrical tape.
7. Shine a light into the rearward facing headlamp photocell sensor. The mirror glass should darken. If OK, go to
Step 8. If not OK, replace the faulty automatic day/night mirror unit.
8. With the mirror glass darkened, place the transmission gear selector lever in the Reverse position. The mirror
should return to its normal reflectance. If not OK, replace the faulty automatic day/night mirror.
SWITCH-MIRROR
DESCRIPTION
A power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel, attached to the window/lock switch. The
power mirror switch includes the following:
• Power Mirror Selector Switch - A three-position
rotary joystick switch selects the right or left
power mirror for adjustment, or turns the power
mirror system Off in the center position.
• Power Mirror Adjustment Switch - A momen-
tary joystick directional switch allows the driver to
adjust the selected power mirror in the Up,
Down, Right or Left directions.
8N - 214 POWER MIRRORS-SERVICE INFORMATION WK
OPERATION
The power mirror switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a fuse in the IPM on a fused B(+) circuit
so that the power mirrors remain operational regardless of the ignition switch position. A rotary joystick selector
switch has three positions, one to select the right mirror, one to select the left mirror, and a center Off position. After
the right or left mirror is selected, the joystick is moved to move the selected mirror Up, Down, Right or Left. In
vehicles without Memory Mirrors the power mirror switch circuitry controls the battery current and ground feeds to
each of the four (two in each mirror head) power mirror motors. In vehicles with Memory Mirrors the mirror switch
connects to the driver power mirror module. The driver memory mirror module uses the mirror switch inputs to con-
trol the battery current and ground feeds to driver mirror motor and sends a CAN Bus message to the passenger
mirror module. The passenger mirror module controls the battery current and ground feeds to passenger mirror
motors based on the CAN bus message from the driver memory module.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
POWER MIRROR SWITCH
1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the power mirror switch. Disconnect the wire harness
connector from the switch.
2. Test the switch continuity. See the Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect
switch in each switch position. If not OK, replace the inoperative switch as required.
POWER MIRROR SWITCH TEST
CONTINUITY BETWEEN
SWITCH POSITION PINS OF MIRROR
SWITCH
LEFT MIRROR SELECTED
UP PINS 5 & 7, PINS 4 & 3
DOWN PINS 4 & 7, PINS 5 & 3
RIGHT PINS 4 & 9, PINS 5 & 3
LEFT PINS 4 & 3, PINS 5 & 9
RIGHT MIRROR SELECTED
UP PINS 4 & 3, PINS 5 & 6
DOWN PINS 4 & 6, PINS 5 & 3
RIGHT PINS 4 & 8, PINS 5 & 3
LEFT PINS 4 & 3, PINS 5 & 8
WK POWER MIRRORS-SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 215
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
2. Remove the door trim panel.
3. Remove the power mirror switch from the door trim
panel by twisting switch.
INSTALLATION
1. Install power mirror switch to door trim panel.
2. Connect wire harness connectors to switches.
3. Install door trim panel.
4. Connect battery negative cable.
8N - 216 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS U0154-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE . . . 282
B1D62–POWER SEAT SWITCH STUCK . . . . 217 U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D63–POWER SEAT SWITCH OPEN . . . . . 218 CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
B1D6D–SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION U0156-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM . 282
SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D6E–SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE . . . . 282
SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC
B1D71–SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 U0168-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D72–SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE
SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 (SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
B1D75–SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION U0169-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . 283
B1D76–SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION U0181–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 HEADLAMP LEVEL TRANSLATOR . . . . . . . . 283
B1D79–SEAT RECLINER POSITION U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
B1D7A–SEAT RECLINER POSITION U0186-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
B1D7B–SEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR U0195-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . 242 SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
B1D7F–SEAT FRONT VERTICAL MOTOR U0196-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . 248 VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL
B1D83–SEAT REAR VERTICAL MOTOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . 254 U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D87–SEAT RECLINER MOTOR CONTROL HANDS FREE PHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 U0199-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1D9B–SEAT HORIZONTAL FRONT STOP DRIVER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
NOT LEARNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 U0200-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW ....... . 268 PASSENGER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . 284
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . 270 U0208-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B221C- MEMORY SEAT MODULE HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . 284
INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 U0212–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE . . 273 SCCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
U0021-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . 276 U0231-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RAIN
U0022-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . 278 SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
U0023-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . 278 U0241-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUTO
U0024-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . 279 HIGHBEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL
U0025-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . 282 MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
U0026-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . 282 POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION
U0141–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TEST – VER 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS .......... . 286
U0151-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER . . . 282
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 217
POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
B1D62–POWER SEAT SWITCH STUCK
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Memory Seat Module detects the switch engaged in an active position for over 50 seconds, this
code will set.
Possible Causes
DRIVER SEAT SWITCH
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Press the Seat Switch in all directions several times.
Wait one minute.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1D62–POWER SEAT SWITCH STUCK?
Yes >> Replace the Driver Seat Switch as necessary.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
8N - 218 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D63–POWER SEAT SWITCH OPEN
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 219
B1D63–POWER SEAT SWITCH OPEN (CONTINUED)
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
When the Memory Seat Module detects an open driver seat switch MUX circuit this code will set.
Possible Causes
(P239) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUX OPEN
(P339) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX OPEN
(P599) DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN OPEN
DRIVER SEAT SWITCH
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Press the Seat Switch in all directions several times.
Wait one minute.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1D63–POWER SEAT SWITCH OPEN?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
2. CHECK THE (P239) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT RESISTANCE
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C4 connector.
NOTE: Check connectors - Clean and repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance between the (P239) Driver Seat Rear Vertical/
Horizontal Switch MUX circuit and the (P599) Driver Seat Switch MUX
Return circuit in the C4 connector.
Is the resistance 47.0 ohms + or – 1.0?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Go To 5
8N - 220 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D63–POWER SEAT SWITCH OPEN (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (P339) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT RESISTANCE
Measure the resistance between the (P339) Driver Seat Front Vertical/
Recliner Switch MUX circuit and the (P599) Driver Seat Switch MUX
Return circuit in the C4 connector.
Is the resistance 47.0 ohms + or – 1.0?
Yes >> Replace the Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 4
4. CHECK THE (P339) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX WIRE RESISTANCE
Disconnect the Driver Seat Switch.
NOTE: Check connectors - Clean and repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (P339) Driver Seat Front Vertical/Re-
cliner Switch MUX circuit between the C4 connector and the Driver
Seat Switch connector.
Is the resistance below 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Replace the Driver Seat Switch.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Repair the (P339) Driver Seat Front Vertical/Recliner
Switch MUX circuit for an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 221
B1D63–POWER SEAT SWITCH OPEN (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (P239) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUX WIRE RESISTANCE
Measure the resistance of the (P239) Driver Seat Rear Vertical/Hori-
zontal Switch MUX circuit between the C4 connector and the Driver
Seat Switch connector.
Is the resistance below 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Go To 6
No >> Repair the (P239) Driver Seat Rear Vertical/Horizontal
Switch MUX circuit for an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
6. CHECK THE (P599) DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN WIRE RESISTANCE
Measure the resistance of the (P599) Driver Seat Switch MUX Return
circuit between the C4 connector and the Driver Seat Switch connec-
tor.
Is the resistance below 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Replace the Driver Seat Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1 (Refer to
BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1).
No >> Repair the (P599) Driver Seat Switch MUX Return circuit
for an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
8N - 222 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D6D–SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 223
B1D6D–SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW (CONTINUED)
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When the seat motor is activated (sensor supply voltage is switched on whenever motor is activated).
• Set Condition:
If sensor voltage is not within a specified range this DTC will set. This DTC will only set when the seat switch
is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
(G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
DRIVER HORIZONTAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Move the Seat Switch in the Horizontal position 3 times.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1D6D–SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
2. CHECK THE (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Move the Seat Switch in the Horizontal position during the next step.
Using a 12-volt test light connect one lead to the (G401) Driver Seat
Horizontal Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat
Horizontal Sensor Ground at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor
connector.
Does the test light illuminate for approximately 2 seconds then
turn off with the seat switch engaged?
Yes >> Replace the seat track horizontal motor assembly.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 3
8N - 224 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D6D–SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C3 connector.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position
Sense wire at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
ground.
Is the resistance below 1000.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense
circuit for a short to ground.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Replace the Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 225
B1D6E–SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
8N - 226 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D6E–SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When the seat motor is activated (sensor supply voltage is switched on whenever motor is activated).
• Set Condition:
If during motor operation the sensor voltage is not within a specified range this code will set. This DTC will
only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
(G401) DRIVER SEAT HORZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
DRIVER RECLINER SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Move the seat switch in the horizontal position 3 times.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1D6E–SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
2. CHECK THE (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
With the scan tool erase DTC’s
Move the seat switch in the horizontal positions 3 times.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the same DTC reset?
No >> Inspect the position sense wire for a possible intermittent short to voltage from another circuit, if OK
replace the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
Yes >> Inspect the position sense wire for a possible short to voltage from another circuit, if OK replace the
Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 227
B1D71–SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
8N - 228 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D71–SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW (CONTINUED)
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When the seat motor is activated (sensor supply voltage is switched on whenever motor is activated).
• Set Condition:
If sensor voltage is not within a specified range this DTC will set. This DTC will only set when the seat switch
is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
(G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Move the Seat Switch in the Front Vertical position 3 times.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1D71–SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 229
B1D71–SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK THE (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Front Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Move the seat switch in the front vertical position during the next step.
Using a 12-volt test light connect one lead to the (G404) Driver Seat
Front Vertical Position Sense circuit and the other lead to the Driver
Seat Front Vertical Sensor Ground at the Front Driver Seat Adjuster
Motor connector.
Does the test light illuminate for approximately 2 seconds then
turn off with the seat switch engaged?
Yes >> Replace the Front Driver Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C3 connector.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Posi-
tion Sense wire at the Front Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor con-
nector to ground.
Is the resistance below 1000.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position
Sense circuit for a short to ground.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Replace the Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
8N - 230 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D72–SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 231
B1D72–SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When the seat motor is activated (sensor supply voltage is switched on whenever motor is activated).
• Set Condition:
If during motor operation the sensor voltage is not within a specified range this code will set. This DTC will
only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
(G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
REAR DRIVER VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Move the seat switch front vertical position 3 times.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1D72–SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
2. CHECK THE (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Front Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
With the scan tool erase DTC’s
Move the seat switch in the both front vertical positions 3 times.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the same DTC reset?
No >> Inspect the position sense wire for a possible intermittent short to another circuit, if OK replace the Front
Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
Yes >> Inspect the position sense wire for a possible short to another circuit, if OK replace the Memory Seat
Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
8N - 232 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D75–SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 233
B1D75–SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW (CONTINUED)
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When the seat motor is activated (sensor supply voltage is switched on whenever motor is activated).
• Set Condition:
If sensor voltage is not within a specified range this DTC will set. This DTC will only set when the seat switch
is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
(G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
REAR DRIVER VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Move the Seat Switch in the Rear Vertical position 3 times.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1D75–SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
8N - 234 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D75–SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK THE (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Move the seat switch in the rear vertical position during the next step.
Using a 12-volt test light connect one lead to the (G402) Driver Seat
Rear Vertical Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat
Rear Vertical Sensor Ground at the Rear Driver Seat Adjuster Motor
connector.
Does the test light illuminate for approximately 2 seconds then
turn off with the seat switch engaged?
Yes >> Replace the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor
assembly.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C3 connector.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Posi-
tion Sense wire at the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor con-
nector to ground.
Is the resistance below 1000.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position
Sense circuit for a short to ground.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Replace the Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 235
B1D76–SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
8N - 236 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D76–SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When the seat motor is activated (sensor supply voltage is switched on whenever motor is activated).
• Set Condition:
If during motor operation the sensor voltage is not within a specified range this code will set. This DTC will
only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
(G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
REAR DRIVER VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Move the seat switch rear vertical position 3 times.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1D76–SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
2. CHECK THE (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
With the scan tool erase DTC’s
Move the seat switch in the both rear vertical positions 3 times.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the same DTC reset?
No >> Inspect the position sense wire for a possible intermittent short to voltage from another circuit, if OK
replace the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
Yes >> Inspect the position sense wire for a possible short to voltage from another circuit, if OK replace the
Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 237
B1D79–SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
8N - 238 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D79–SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW (CONTINUED)
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When the seat motor is activated (sensor supply voltage is switched on whenever motor is activated).
• Set Condition:
If sensor voltage is not within a specified range this DTC will set. This DTC will only set when the seat switch
is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
(G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
DRIVER RECLINER SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Move the Seat Switch recliner position 3 times.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1D79–SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 239
B1D79–SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW (CONTINUED)
2. CHECK THE (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Move the seat switch in the recliner position during the next step.
Using a 12-volt test light connect one lead to the (G403) Driver Seat
Recliner Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat
Recliner Position Sensor Ground at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster
Motor connector.
Does the test light illuminate for approximately 2 seconds then
turn off with the seat switch engaged?
Yes >> Replace the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 3
3. CHECK THE (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C2 connector.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position
Sense wire at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
ground.
Is the resistance below 1000.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sense cir-
cuit for a short to ground.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Replace the Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
8N - 240 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D7A–SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 241
B1D7A–SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
When the seat motor is activated (sensor supply voltage is switched on whenever motor is activated).
• Set Condition:
If during motor operation the sensor voltage is not within a specified range this code will set. This DTC will
only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
(G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
DRIVER RECLINER SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Move the seat switch recliner position 3 times.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1D7A–SEAT BACKREST POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
2. CHECK THE (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
With the scan tool erase DTC’s
Move the seat switch in the both recliner positions 3 times.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the same DTC reset?
No >> Inspect the position sense wire for a possible intermittent short to voltage from another circuit, if OK
replace the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
Yes >> Inspect the position sense wire for a possible short to voltage from another circuit, if OK replace the
Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
8N - 242 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D7B–SEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 243
B1D7B–SEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Whenever the seat motor is activated.
• Set Condition:
If the Memory Seat Module does not detect the rotation of the seat motor this DTC will set. This DTC will only
set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
SEAT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
(G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(G491) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(P115) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER
(P117) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER
DRIVER HORIZONTAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR RELATED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display any seat position sensor DTC’s?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the other DTC(s) first. Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete
list of symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Move the Seat Switch in the Horizontal position 3 times.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1D7B–SEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
8N - 244 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D7B–SEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Move the Seat Switch in the Horizontal position during the next step.
Using a 12-volt test light connect one lead to the (G401) Driver Seat
Horizontal Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat
Horizontal Sensor Ground at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor
connector.
Does the test light illuminate for approximately 2 seconds then
turn off with the seat switch engaged?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
4. CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD/REARWARD DRIVER VOLTAGE
Move the Seat Switch in the Horizontal position during the next step.
Using a 12-volt test light connect one lead to the (P115) Driver Seat
Horizontal Forward Driver circuit and the other lead to (P117) Driver
Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver circuit at the Driver Horizontal Seat
Adjuster Motor connector.
Does the test light illuminate with the seat switch engaged?
Yes >> Replace the track/horizontal motor assembly.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 7
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 245
B1D7B–SEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C3 connector.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position
Sense circuit at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
the C3 connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense
circuit for an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK THE (G491) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (G491) Driver Seat Horizontal Sensor
Ground circuit at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor connector
to the C3 connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (G491) Driver Seat Horizontal Senor Ground
circuit for an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Replace the Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
8N - 246 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D7B–SEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
7. CHECK THE (P115) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C3 connector.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (P115) Driver Seat Horizontal Forward
Driver circuit at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
the C3 connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (P115) Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver
circuit for an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 8
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 247
B1D7B–SEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
8. CHECK THE (P117) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P117) Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward
Driver circuit at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
the C3 connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (P117) Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver
circuit for an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Replace the Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS -
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
8N - 248 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D7F–SEAT FRONT VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 249
B1D7F–SEAT FRONT VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Whenever the seat motor is activated.
• Set Condition:
If the Memory Seat Module does not detect the rotation of the seat motor this DTC will set. This DTC will only
set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
SEAT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
(G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(G494) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(P119) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER
(P121) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER
FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR RELATED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display any seat position sensor DTC’s?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair other DTC(s) first. Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete list
of symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Move the Seat Switch in the Front Vertical position 3 times.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1D7F–SEAT FRONT VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
8N - 250 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D7F–SEAT FRONT VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Front Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Move the Seat Switch in the front vertical position during the next step.
Using a 12-volt test light connect one lead to the (G404) Driver Seat
Front Vertical Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat
Front Vertical Sensor Ground at the Driver Front Vertical Seat Adjuster
Motor connector.
Does the test light illuminate for approximately 2 seconds then
turn off with the seat switch engaged?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
4. CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP/DOWN DRIVER VOLTAGE
Move the Seat Switch in the front vertical position during the next step.
Using a 12-volt test light connect one lead to the (G119) Driver Seat
Front Vertical Up Driver circuit and the other lead to (P121) Driver
Seat Front Vertical Down Driver circuit at the Front Driver Vertical Seat
Adjuster Motor connector.
Does the test light illuminate with the seat switch engaged?
Yes >> Replace the Front Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster motor
assembly.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
No >> Go To 7
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 251
B1D7F–SEAT FRONT VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C3 connector.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Posi-
tion Sense circuit at the Front Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor con-
nector to the C3 connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position
Sense circuit for an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
No >> Go To 6
6. CHECK THE (G494) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (G494) Driver Seat Front Vertical Sen-
sor Ground circuit at the Driver Front Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor con-
nector to the C3 connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (G494) Driver Seat Front Vertical Senor Ground
circuit for an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
No >> Replace the Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
8N - 252 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D7F–SEAT FRONT VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
7. CHECK THE (P119) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C3 connector.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (P119) Driver Seat Front Vertical Up
Driver circuit at the Driver Front Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector
to the C3 connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (P119) Driver Seat Front Vertical Up Driver cir-
cuit for an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
No >> Go To 8
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 253
B1D7F–SEAT FRONT VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
8. CHECK THE (P121) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P121) Driver Seat Front Vertical Down
Driver circuit at the Driver Front Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector
to the C3 connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (P121) Driver Seat Front Vertical Down Driver
circuit for an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
No >> Replace the Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
8N - 254 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D83–SEAT REAR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 255
B1D83–SEAT REAR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Whenever the seat motor is activated.
• Set Condition:
If the Memory Seat Module does not detect the rotation of the seat motor this DTC will set. This DTC will only
set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
SEAT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
(G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(G492) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(P111) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER
(P113) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER
REAR DRIVER VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR RELATED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display any seat position sensor DTC’s?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair other DTC(s) first. Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete list
of symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Move the Seat Switch in the Rear Vertical position 3 times.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1D83–SEAT REAR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
8N - 256 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D83–SEAT REAR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Move the Seat Switch in the rear vertical position during the next step.
Using a 12-volt test light connect one lead to the (G402) Driver Seat
Rear Vertical Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat
Rear Vertical Sensor Ground at the Driver Rear Vertical Seat Adjuster
Motor connector.
Does the test light illuminate for approximately 2 seconds then
turn off with the seat switch engaged?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
4. CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP/DOWN DRIVER VOLTAGE
Move the Seat Switch in the rear vertical position during the next step.
Using a 12-volt test light connect one lead to the (P111) Driver Seat
Rear Vertical Up Driver circuit and the other lead to (P113) Driver Seat
Rear Vertical Down Driver circuit at the Rear Driver Vertical Seat
Adjuster Motor connector.
Does the test light illuminate with the seat switch engaged?
Yes >> Replace the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster motor
assembly.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
No >> Go To 7
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 257
B1D83–SEAT REAR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C3 connector.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Posi-
tion Sense circuit at the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor con-
nector to the C3 connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position
Sense circuit for an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
No >> Go To 6
8N - 258 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D83–SEAT REAR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
6. CHECK THE (G492) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (G492) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Sensor
Ground circuit at the Driver Rear Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connec-
tor to the C3 connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (G492) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Senor Ground
circuit for an open.
Perform MEMORY SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST – VER
1
No >> Replace the Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 259
B1D83–SEAT REAR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
7. CHECK THE (P111) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C3 connector.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (P111) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Up
Driver circuit at the Driver Rear Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector
to the C3 connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (P111) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Up Driver cir-
cuit for an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
No >> Go To 8
8. CHECK THE (P113) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P113) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Down
Driver circuit at the Driver Rear Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector
to the C3 connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (P113) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Down Driver
circuit for an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
No >> Replace the Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
8N - 260 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D87–SEAT RECLINER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 261
B1D87–SEAT RECLINER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Whenever the seat motor is activated.
• Set Condition:
If the Memory Seat Module does not detect the rotation of the seat motor this DTC will set. This DTC will only
set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
SEAT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
(G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(G493) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(P141) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER
(P143) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER
DRIVER RECLINER SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR RELATED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display any seat position sensor DTC’s?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the other DTC(s) first. Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete
list of symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Move the Seat Switch in the Recliner position 3 times.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1D7B–SEAT BACKREST MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
8N - 262 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D87–SEAT RECLINER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Move the Seat Switch in the Recliner position during the next step.
Using a 12-volt test light connect one lead to the (G403) Driver Seat
Recliner Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat
Recliner Position Sensor Ground at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster
Motor connector.
Does the test light illuminate for approximately 2 seconds then
turn off with the seat switch engaged?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Go To 5
4. CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT RECLINER FORWARD/REARWARD DRIVER VOLTAGE
Move the Seat Switch in the Recliner position during the next step.
Using a 12-volt test light connect one lead to the (P141) Driver Seat
Recliner Up Driver circuit and the other lead to (P143) Driver Seat
Recliner Down Driver circuit at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor
connector.
Does the test light illuminate with the seat switch engaged?
Yes >> Replace the Recliner motor assembly.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
No >> Go To 7
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 263
B1D87–SEAT RECLINER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
5. CHECK THE (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C2 connector.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position
Sense circuit at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
the C2 connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sense cir-
cuit for an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
No >> Go To 6
8N - 264 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D87–SEAT RECLINER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
6. CHECK THE (G493) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSTION SENSOR GROUND FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (G493) Driver Seat Recliner Position
Sensor Ground circuit at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor con-
nector to the C2 connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (G493) Driver Seat Recliner Position Senor
Ground circuit for an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
No >> Replace the Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 265
B1D87–SEAT RECLINER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
7. CHECK THE (P141) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C2 connector.
NOTE: Check connectors – Clean and repair as necessary.
Measure the resistance of the (P141) Driver Seat Recliner Up Driver
circuit at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor connector to the C2
connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (P141) Driver Seat Recliner Up Driver circuit for
an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
No >> Go To 8
8N - 266 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B1D87–SEAT RECLINER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
8. CHECK THE (P143) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P143) Driver Seat Recliner Down
Driver circuit at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
the C2 connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes >> Repair the (P143) Driver Seat Recliner Down Driver circuit
for an open.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
No >> Replace the Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 267
B1D9B–SEAT HORIZONTAL FRONT STOP NOT LEARNED
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Whenever the seat motor is activated.
• Set Condition:
Seat becomes de-standardized. If the seat is not standardized, an Easy Exit/Entry function can not be per-
formed. If seat is standardized (learn seat cushion horizontal front hardstop) and then becomes de-standard-
ized (conditions are: seat cushion motor is 5% past the expected hard stop position or seat cushion hall sensor
failure is occured), a DTC is logged.
Possible Causes
OTHER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES SET IN THE MEMORY SEAT MODULE
SEAT STANDERDIZATION ROUTINE NOT PERFORMED
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR RELATED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display any seat position sensor or circuit performance DTC’s?
Yes >> Diagnose and repair the other DTC(s) first. Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete
list of symptoms.
No >> Go To 2
2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Move the seat in the full forward horizontal position.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1D9B–SEAT HORIZONTAL FRONT STOP NOT LEARNED?
Yes >> With the scan tool, perform the MSM Standard Routine.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
8N - 268 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:Engine running, during seat motor operation.
• Set Condition:This code is set immediately after the Seat Memory Module receives a low charging system
voltage message over the CAN B Bus or detects voltage under 9.5 volts on the (A110) Fused B(+) circuit.
Possible Causes
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLAGE LOW
(A110) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT
SEAT MEMORY MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding.
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK PCM FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTC
With the scan tool, read Powertrain Control Module DTC’s.
Are there any Charging System DTC’s set in the Powertrain Control Module?
Yes >> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/CHARGING - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for Charging System diagnostic
procedures.
No >> Go To 2
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1.
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW IS ACTIVE
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Turn the ignition switch to the Off position then start the engine and operate the driver power seat.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the DTC B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW reset?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1.
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 269
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE VOLTAGE ON THE (A110) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module connector.
NOTE: Check connectors - Clean and repair as necessary.
Start the engine and let idle.
Measure the voltage on the (A110) Fused B(+) circuit at the MSM con-
nector and compare to voltage at the vehicle battery.
Is the voltage at the MSM connector the same as measured at
the battery?
Yes >> Replace the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the
service information.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1.
No >> Repair the (A110) Fused B(+) circuit as necessary.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1.
8N - 270 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
For the Heated Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/HEATED SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:Engine running, during seat operation.
• Set Condition:This code is set immediately after the Memory Seat Module receives a high charging system
voltage message over the CAN B Bus or detects voltage over 16.5 volts on the (A110) Fused B(+) circuit.
Possible Causes
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLAGE HIGH
(A110) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding.
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK PCM FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTC
With the scan tool, read Powertrain Control Module DTC’s.
Are there any Charging System DTC’s set in the Powertrain Control Module?
Yes >> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/CHARGING - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for Charging System diagnostic
procedures.
No >> Go To 2
2. VERIFY THAT DTC B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH IS ACTIVE
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Turn the ignition switch to the Off position then start the engine and let run for one minute.
Attempt to operate the driver power seat.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the DTC B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH reset?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1.
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 271
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH (CONTINUED)
3. CHECK THE VOLTAGE ON THE (A110) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT
Disconnect the Seat Memory Module connector.
NOTE: Check connectors - Clean and repair as necessary.
Start the engine and let idle.
Measure the voltage on the (A110) Fused B(+) circuit at the MSM con-
nector and compare to voltage at the vehicles battery.
Is the voltage at the MSM connector the same as measured at
the battery?
Yes >> Replace the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the
service information.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1.
No >> Repair the (A110) Fused B(+) circuit as necessary.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST –
VER 1.
8N - 272 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
B221C- MEMORY SEAT MODULE INTERNAL
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/HEATED SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:Ignition on.
• Set Condition:This code is set immediately if the Memory Seat Module internal self test fails.
Possible Causes
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding.
Diagnostic Test
1. VERIFY THAT DTC B221C- MEMORY SEAT MODULE INTERNAL IS ACTIVE
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Cycle the ignition switch off then back on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the DTC B221C-MEMORY SEAT MODULE INTERNAL reset?
Yes >> Replace the Memory Seat Module.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1.
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1.
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 273
U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE
8N - 274 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit or (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit open.
Possible Causes
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase MSM DTC’s
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read active MSM DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display this DTC as active?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
2. (D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector.
Measure the voltage between the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit and
ground.
Is there any voltage present?
Yes >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted
circuits. If ok, replace the Memory Seat Module in accor-
dance with the service information.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 275
U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
3. (D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector.
Measure the voltage between the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit and
ground.
Is there any voltage present?
Yes >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted
circuits. If ok, replace the Memory Seat Module in accor-
dance with the service information.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Repair the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
8N - 276 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
U0021-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 277
U0021-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN (CONTINUED)
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit is open.
Possible Causes
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase MSM DTC’s
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read active MSM DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display this DTC as active?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
2. (D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector.
Measure the voltage between the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit and
ground.
Is there any voltage present?
Yes >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted
circuits. If ok, replace the Memory Seat Module in accor-
dance with the service information.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
8N - 278 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
U0022-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT LOW
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0023-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT HIGH
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 279
U0024-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
8N - 280 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
U0024-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN (CONTINUED)
For the Power Seat System circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - SCHEMATICS AND DIA-
GRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit is open.
Possible Causes
(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Theory of Operation
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase MSM DTC’s
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read active MSM DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display this DTC as active?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 281
U0024-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN (CONTINUED)
2. (D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector.
Measure the voltage between the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit and
ground.
Is there any voltage present?
Yes >> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted
circuits. If ok, replace the Memory Seat Module in accor-
dance with the service information.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST -
VER 1.
No >> Repair the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
8N - 282 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
U0025-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT LOW
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0026-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT HIGH
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0141–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0151-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0154-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0156-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC CONTROL MODULE
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 283
U0168-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE
(SKREEM/WCM)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0169-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0181–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEADLAMP LEVEL TRANSLATOR
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RADIO
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0186-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUDIO AMPLIFIER
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0195-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SDARS
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0196-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL
MODULE
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HANDS FREE PHONE
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0199-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DRIVER DOOR MODULE
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
8N - 284 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
U0200-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PASSENGER DOOR MODULE
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0208-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0212–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SCCM
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0231-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RAIN SENSING MODULE
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0241-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUTO HIGHBEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL
MODULE
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
WK POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS 8N - 285
POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1
Diagnostic Test
1. Perform Power Seat System Verification Test
Disconnect all jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components and connectors.
Ensure that all accessories are turned off.
Ensure that the battery is fully charged.
Turn the ignition on.
If either the Memory Seat Module or the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor/Seat Track was replaced, the MSM
Standard Routine must be performed using the scan tool.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs from all modules.
Operate the driver seat in all positions.
With the Memory Switch on the Driver’s Door, program the Driver’s Seat #1 Button to a desired position and Driver
#2 Button to a different position.
Verify that both Memory positions can be recalled from the RKE transmitter and the Memory Switch on the Driver’s
Door.
Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, select ECU View.
Check for DTCs in the modules.
Are DTCs present in any of the modules or is the original condition still present?
Yes >> The repair is not complete. Refer to the related category for the DTC or symptom that is still present.
No >> The repair is complete.
8N - 286 POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS WK
SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS
POWER SEAT SYSTEM MSM
WK POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 287
POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION POWER SEAT RECLINER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING SWITCH-SEAT
MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM ......... . . . . . 291 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
POWER SEAT ADJUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
STANDARD PROCEDURE DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
MEMORY SYSTEM PROGRAMMING . . . . . . 292 POWER SEAT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
POWER SEAT SYSTEM
WARNING: The front passenger seat assembly contains critical components that affect the front passenger
airbag deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat components are critical for the Occupant
Classification System (OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calculate the proper airbag deploy-
ment. Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly, its related
components, or trim cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way.
• Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat trim covers not designated for the specific model being
repaired. Always use the correct seat trim cover specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat trim cover with an aftermarket trim cover.
• Do not add a secondary trim cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by
DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
8N - 288 POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION WK
The power seat system allows the driver and front
seat passenger to electrically adjust their seating posi-
tions using the power seat switches located on the
outboard seat cushion side shield of each front seat.
A driver side eight-way power seat includes a six-way
adjustable seat cushion track and a two-way power
seat back. The driver power seat can be adjusted up,
down, front up, front down, forward, rearward, recliner
forward, and recliner rearward. A passenger side four-
way power seat includes a two-way adjustable seat
cushion track and a two-way power seat back. The
passenger power front seat can be adjusted forward,
rearward, recliner forward and recliner rearward. The
power seat system is also available with the heated
seat option and memory seat option that automatically
positions the power seat for two different drivers
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/HEATED SEATS -
DESCRIPTION ) and MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM
below.
The power seat system for this vehicle includes the
following major components:
• Power Seat Adjuster - The power seat adjuster
is made up of the upper and lower power seat
adjuster assemblies. The driver upper power seat
adjuster contains two reversible motors that are
connected to worm-drive gearboxes that move
the seat adjuster through a combination of
screw-type drive units. These motors are the
height adjust motor and the front tilt motor. On
vehicles equipped with non-memory power seats,
each motor contains a self-resetting circuit
breaker to protect it from overload. On vehicles
equipped with memory power seats the motor
overload protection is a function of the Memory
Seat Module (MSM). Consecutive or frequent
resetting of the circuit breakers may damaged
the motors. There are no motors on the passenger upper power seat adjuster.
The height adjust motor is located on the rear of the upper power seat adjuster assembly and controls the up
and down movement of the entire seat. The height adjust motor can be serviced separately from the power
seat adjuster assembly.
WK POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 289
The front tilt motor is located on the front of the
upper power seat adjuster assembly and controls
the up and down movement of the seat front
only. The front tilt motor can be serviced sepa-
rately from the power seat adjuster assembly.
The driver and passenger lower power seat
adjusters contain one reversible motor that is
connected to a worm-drive gearbox that moves
the seat adjuster through a screw-type drive unit.
On vehicles equipped with non-memory power
seats, the motor will contain a self-resetting cir-
cuit breaker to protect it from overload. On vehi-
cles equipped with memory power seats the
motor overload protection is a function of the
Memory Seat Module (MSM). Consecutive or fre-
quent resetting of the circuit breakers may dam-
aged the motors. The motor is part of the lower
power seat track unit and must be replaced as
an assembly, (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT
ADJUSTERS - REMOVAL).
• Power Seat Recliner - The power seat recliner replaces the manual seat recliner.
The power seat option includes an electrically
operated power seat back recliner mechanism.
The power seat recliner switch is integral to the
power seat switch assembly, but is actuated with
a separate switch knob.
The power seat recliner motor assembly is
mounted in the place of a seat hinge on the out-
board side of the seat. The upper hinge plate of
the power seat recliner mechanism is secured
with two screws to the seat back frame and is
concealed beneath the seat back trim cover and
padding. The lower hinge plate and the motor
and drive unit of the power seat recliner mecha-
nism is secured with two screws to the seat
cushion frame, and is concealed by the outboard
seat cushion side shield.
The power seat recliner motor cannot be
repaired. If the unit is inoperative or damaged,
the seat back frame must be replaced, (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/POWER
SEAT MOTOR - REMOVAL).
• Power Seat Switches - Vehicles may be equipped with driver only, or driver and passenger power seat
8N - 290 POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION WK
switches. One seat switch is used for each front
seat. The power seat switches are paddle-type
levers mounted on the outboard seat side
shields. Movement of the seat cushions and
backs mimics the action of the switch paddles.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/
SEAT SWITCH - DESCRIPTION) for additional
information.
MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM
An electronic memory seat system is available on certain models. The memory system is able to store and recall all
driver side power seat positions, and the drivers side view mirror positions. The system can be set for two different
drivers. On vehicles with a factory installed radio connected to the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus network,
the memory system is also able to store and recall up to twenty radio station presets (ten AM and ten FM), also for
two drivers. The memory system also will store and recall the last station listened to for each driver, even if it is not
one of the twenty preset stations.
The memory system will automatically recall all of these settings when a button of the memory switch is depressed,
or when the doors are unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (if enabled). If the vehicle has
more than two drivers the RKE transmitter recall of memory features can be disabled. This is a customer program-
mable feature of the overhead console.
The memory system also has a easy exit feature that will move the driver seat rearward 55 millimeters or to the end
of its travel, whichever occurs first, when the key is removed from the ignition switch lock cylinder. This is a cus-
tomer programmable feature of the overhead console.
The memory system includes the following components:
• Memory Selector Switch - located in the driver door trim panel.
• Driver Memory Mirror Module (DMMM) - located in the driver door, behind the trim panel.
• Passenger Memory Mirror Module (PMMM) - located in the passenger door, behind the trim panel.
• Hall Effect Sensors - Drivers Mirror - The hall effect sensor is permanently installed on the drivers side view
mirror motor. This hall effect sensor is used to provide a reference signal to the memory heated seat mirror
module, letting the module know the exact position of the mirror.
• Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) - located at ignition key cylinder.
• Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter - located with ignition key.
• Memory Seat Module (MSM) - located underneath the driver seat and also controls the Adjustable Pedals.
• Hall Effect Sensors - Seat Track - These hall effect sensors are permanently installed in each of the power
seat track motors. They are used to provide a reference signal to the memory heated seat mirror module,
letting the module know the exact position of the seat cushion and recliner.
• Radio - located in the instrument panel center stack.
• Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) - located in the instrument panel center stack.
Certain functions and features of the memory system rely upon resources shared with other electronic modules in
the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus. The CAN bus allows the sharing of sensor information.
This helps to reduce wire harness complexity, internal controller hardware, and component sensor current loads. At
the same time, this system provides increased reliability, enhanced diagnostics, and allows the addition of many
new feature capabilities. For diagnosis of these electronic modules or of the CAN bus, the use of a scan tool and
the proper diagnostic information are needed.
WK POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 291
OPERATION
POWER SEAT SYSTEM
The power seat system receives battery current through a 50 amp fuse in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) so
that the power seats remain operational, regardless of the ignition switch position.
When a power seat switch is actuated, a battery feed and a ground path are applied through the power seat switch
contacts to the appropriate motor or motors. The motor and drive unit operate to move the seat in the selected
direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the power seat track is reached. When the switch is
moved in the opposite direction, the battery feed and ground path to the motor is reversed through the switch con-
tacts. This causes the motor to run in the opposite direction.
MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM
The Memory Seat Module (MSM) receives battery current through a 50 amp fuse in the Power Distribution Center
(PDC) so that the power seats remain operational, regardless of the ignition switch position. When the driver mem-
ory seat switch control knob is actuated, a resistance signal is sent to the MSM via the Controller Area Network
(CAN) bus circuit. The MSM is responsible for the 12v battery feed and ground path to the power seat adjuster
motor. The adjuster motor operates to move the power seat adjuster mechanism through its drive unit in the
selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached.
The MSM receives memory set/position switch input through the CAN bus circuit. The MSM also receives hard
wired input from the hall effect sensors, mounted on each of the driver power seat adjuster motors and the driver
side view mirror motor. The programmed software in the module allows it to know where the seat/mirror is located
in its designed travel by a pulse count generated from the hall effect sensors. This way, when the memory switch is
depressed the module will power the seat adjuster/mirror motors until the correct preset location is achieved. The
module will prevent the seat memory recall function from being initiated, if the transmission gear selector lever is not
in the Park position, or if the vehicle is moving. These inputs are monitored over the Controller Area Network (CAN)
bus circuit by the MSM.
A memory setting is saved by pressing the “set” button, then pressing either the memory “1” or “2” button within 5
seconds of pressing the “set” button.
A memory setting is recalled by pressing either the memory “1” or “2” button, or by pressing the unlock button on
a “linked” Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
For driver safety, memorized settings can not be recalled if the transmission is in a position other than Park or the
seat belt is latched.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM
In order to obtain conclusive testing of the power seats with and without the memory system option, the Controller
Area Network (CAN) bus, and all of the electronic modules that provide inputs to, or receive outputs from the mem-
ory system components must be checked. Use a scan tool and the proper diagnostic information to accurately diag-
nose the power seat/memory seat systems.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with the memory/heated seat option utilize a low voltage cut-off feature. This fea-
ture turns off the 12v power to the power seat system anytime vehicle voltage is below 11.0v. Be certain to
check the vehicle electrical system for proper voltage anytime the power seat system appears inoperative.
Before any testing of the power seat system is attempted, the battery should be fully-charged.
POWER SEAT ADJUSTER
Operate the power seat switch and move the seat in all directions. The seat should move in each of the selected
directions.
If the power seat adjuster fails to operate in more than one direction, proceed as follows:
1. Inspect the power seat adjuster motors to ensure the electrical connectors are fully seated to the motors. If OK,
go to Step 2. If not OK, connect the electrical connector to the fully seated position.
8N - 292 POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION WK
2. Check the power seat fuse in the power distribution center. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, replace the inoperative
fuse.
3. Remove the power seat switch from the seat cushion side panel. Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+)
circuit cavity of the power seat switch wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open
circuit to the power distribution center as required.
4. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the power seat switch wire harness connector and a
good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 5. If not OK, repair the open circuit to ground as
required.
5. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/SEAT SWITCH - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If the switch tests
OK, check the wire harness between the power seat switch and the motor. If the circuits check OK, replace the
faulty power seat adjuster assembly. If the circuits are not OK, repair the wire harness as required.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
MEMORY SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
The Memory Seat Module (MSM) interfaces with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system via the Controller Area
Network (CAN) bus. The proper procedure of setting and recalling a memory position using the RKE is as follows:
1. Press and release memory switch 1 or 2 to recall memory position 1or 2.
2. Adjust the seat, recliner, adjustable pedal position, set radio station presets, set HVAC temperature preset, and
the side view mirrors to the desired position.
3. Press momentarily and release memory switch S.
4. Within five seconds, press momentarily and release memory switch 1 or 2.
5. To link the RKE transmitter: within ten seconds, press and release the “LOCK” button on one of the RKE trans-
mitters
To program the second driver’s position, repeat the above procedure using memory switch 2. The second RKE
transmitter can be programmed in the same fashion as indicated in step 5 Step 5.
NOTE: The module will abort a recall if the transmission is moved out of park or if any seat movement is
activated whether manually or by memory recall. The module will also abort a recall if any movement of the
adjustable pedals is detected.
To recall either of the programmed positions momentarily press and release either memory selector switch 1 or 2.
If using RKE, just press and release the “UNLOCK” button on the proper transmitter for either position 1 or 2.
A recall is possible any time the vehicle transmission is in PARK and the seatbelt is unbuckled. This condition is
monitored by the MSM.
WK POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 293
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER
REMOVAL
WARNING: A seat structure that has seen signifi-
cant load may have the locking mechanism acti-
vated and may exhibit the following symptoms:
• Locking pawl (2) loose
• Locking pawl (2) engaged into the seat frame
sidemember (1)
• Height adjuster only works on outboard side
• Broken or missing shear pin (3)
If any one or more of these symptoms exist
replace the height adjuster assembly. Do not
attempt any repairs. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury or death.
FRONT TILT MOTOR
1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
2. Remove the affected seat with the inoperative
motor (1) (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT -
FRONT - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the seat cushion and pan (Refer to 23 -
BODY/SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER -
REMOVAL).
8N - 294 POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION WK
4. Disconnect the motor electrical connector.
5. Remove the fasteners holding the motor to the seat
adjuster (1).
6. Remove motor from seat adjuster (2).
HEIGHT ADJUST MOTOR
WARNING: Use caution when removing the height adjust motor (3) if the motor is inoperative, and the
power seat is not in the full up position. The seat adjuster assembly (2) is under load from the height adjust
spring and may cause the motor to rotate under pressure when the fasteners are removed. The seat
adjuster assembly also may spring upward when the motor is removed. If the height adjust motor is oper-
ative, move the power seat to the full up position prior to disconnecting the battery.
WK POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 295
1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
2. Remove the affected seat with the inoperative
motor (3) (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT -
FRONT - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the seat cushion and pan (Refer to 23 -
BODY/SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER -
REMOVAL).
4. Disconnect the motor electrical connector.
5. Remove the fasteners (1) holding the motor (3) to
the seat adjuster (2).
6. Remove screw and washer from the motor shaft.
7. Remove motor (3) from seat adjuster (2).
8N - 296 POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION WK
INSTALLATION
WARNING: A seat structure that has seen signifi-
cant load may have the locking mechanism acti-
vated and may exhibit the following symptoms:
• Locking pawl (2) loose
• Locking pawl (2) engaged into the seat frame
sidemember (1)
• Height adjuster only works on outboard side
• Broken or missing shear pin (3)
If any one or more of these symptoms exist
replace the height adjuster assembly. Do not
attempt any repairs. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury or death.
FRONT TILT MOTOR
1. Position motor (1) on seat adjuster (2).
WK POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 297
2. Install the fasteners (1) holding the motor to the
seat adjuster (2). Tighten the screws to 5 N·m (44
in. lbs.).
3. Connect the motor electrical connector.
4. Install the seat cushion (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER - INSTALLA-
TION).
5. Clip the wire harness to cushion pan.
6. Install the seat assembly (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT - INSTALLATION).
7. Connect the battery negative cable.
8. Verify normal operation of the power seat
assembly.
8N - 298 POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION WK
HEIGHT ADJUST MOTOR
1. Ensure the seat adjuster (2) is in the full up posi-
tion by pulling upward on the upper adjuster
assembly.
2. Position motor (3) on seat adjuster (2).
3. Install the motor shaft screw and washer and
tighten until snug. Do not torque screw at this
time.
4. Install the screws (1) holding the motor (3) to the
seat adjuster (2). It may be necessary to twist
the motor slightly to align the fastener holes.
5. Starting with the bottom screw, tighten the motor
screws (1) to 9 N·m (80 in. lbs.).
6. Tighten the motor shaft screw and washer to 6.5
N·m (57.5 in. lbs.).
WK POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 299
7. Connect the motor electrical connector.
8. Install the seat cushion (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER - INSTALLA-
TION).
9. Clip the wire harness to cushion pan.
10. Install the seat assembly (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT - INSTALLATION).
11. Connect the battery negative cable.
12. Verify normal operation of the power seat
assembly.
POWER SEAT RECLINER
REMOVAL
1. Remove the seat back frame assembly (Refer to
23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT BACK CUSHION/COVER
- REMOVAL).
2. Remove any parts that will need to be installed on
new seat back frame assembly.
8N - 300 POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION WK
INSTALLATION
1. Install parts from old seat back assembly as nec-
essary.
2. Install the seat back (1) (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT BACK CUSHION/COVER -
INSTALLATION).
SWITCH-SEAT
DESCRIPTION
The driver power seat can be adjusted in eight different ways using the power seat switch. The passenger power
seat can be adjusted in four different ways. The power seat switch is located on the lower outboard side of the seat
cushion on the seat cushion side shield on all models.
The individual switches in the power seat switch assembly cannot be repaired. If one switch is damaged or faulty,
the entire power seat switch must be replaced.
OPERATION
When a power seat switch is actuated, a battery feed and a ground path are applied through the switch contacts to
the power seat adjuster or recliner adjuster motor. The selected adjuster motor operates to move the seat or recliner
through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is
reached. When the switch is moved in the opposite direction, the battery feed and ground path to the motor are
reversed through the switch contacts. This causes the adjuster motor to run in the opposite direction.
On vehicles equipped with memory system, a resistance signal is sent to the Memory Seat Module (MSM) via the
Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit, when the driver memory seat switch control knob is actuated. The MSM
is responsible for the 12v battery feed and ground path to the power seat adjuster motor. The adjuster motor oper-
ates to move the power seat adjuster mechanism through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is
released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached.
No power seat switch should be held applied in any direction after the adjuster has reached its travel limit. The
power seat adjuster motors each contain a self-resetting circuit breaker to protect them from overload. However,
consecutive or frequent resetting of the circuit breaker may result in motor damage.
WK POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 301
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
POWER SEAT SWITCH
DRIVER WITHOUT MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM
1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/SEAT
SWITCH - REMOVAL).
3. Use an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the
power seat switch. Refer to DRIVER POWER
SEAT SWITCH WITHOUT MEMORY SEAT SYS-
TEM CONTINUITY table. If not OK, replace the
faulty power seat switch. If switch tests OK (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/POWER
SEAT ADJUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
DRIVER POWER SEAT SWITCH WITHOUT MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM CONTINUITY
SWITCH POSITION CONTINUITY BETWEEN
OFF 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
RECLINER UP 6-3, 7-1, 7-2, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
RECLINER DOWN 6-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
HORIZONTAL FORWARD 6-8, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
HORIZONTAL REARWARD 6-4, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
FRONT TILT DOWN 6-5, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
FRONT TILT UP 6-9, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-10, 7-11
REAR TILT DOWN 6-10, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-11
REAR TILT UP 6-11, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10
PASSENGER SEAT
1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/SEAT
SWITCH - REMOVAL).
3. Use an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the
power seat switch. Refer to PASSENGER POWER
SEAT SWITCH CONTINUITY table. If not OK,
replace the faulty power seat switch. If switch tests
OK (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/
POWER SEAT ADJUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING).
8N - 302 POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION WK
PASSENGER POWER SEAT SWITCH CONTINUITY
SWITCH POSITION CONTINUITY BETWEEN
OFF 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-8
RECLINER UP 6-3, 7-1, 7-4, 7-8
RECLINER DOWN 6-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-8
HORIZONTAL FORWARD 6-8, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4
HORIZONTAL REARWARD 6-4, 7-1, 7-3, 7-8
DRIVER WITH MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM
1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/SEAT
SWITCH - REMOVAL).
3. Use an ohmmeter to test the resistance of the
power seat switch. Refer to DRIVER POWER
SEAT SWITCH WITH MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM
CONTINUITY table. If not OK, replace the faulty
power seat switch. If switch tests OK (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/POWER SEAT
ADJUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
DRIVER POWER SEAT SWITCH WITH MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM CONTINUITY
SWITCH POSITION CONTINUITY BETWEEN RESISTANCE VALUE
OFF 10-4 OPEN
OFF 10-11 OPEN
OFF 1-4 47 OHMS
OFF 1-11 47 OHMS
REAR TILT UP 10-11 169 OHMS
REAR TILT DOWN 10-11 76 OHMS
HORIZONTAL FORWARD 10-11 43 OHMS
HORIZONTAL REARWARD 10-11 10 OHMS
RECLINER UP 10-4 43 OHMS
RECLINER DOWN 10-4 10 OHMS
FRONT TILT UP 10-4 169 OHMS
FRONT TILT DOWN 10-4 76 OHMS
ALL RESISTANCE VALUES ARE ± FIVE PERCENT
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
2. Remove the seat cushion side panel from the seat and disconnect the electrical harness connector.
3. Using a small flat bladed tool, gently release the four mounting tabs that secure the power seat switch and sep-
arate switch from trim panel.
WK POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 303
INSTALLATION
1. Position the power seat switch on the seat cushion side panel. Gently apply pressure to the switch until the four
mounting tabs that secure the switch snap into place.
2. Connect the power seat switch electrical connector.
3. Install the seat cushion side panel on the seat.
4. Connect the battery negative cable.
5. Verify normal operation of the power seat assembly.
8N - 304 POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS WK
POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS B2227–SUNROOF ECU INTERNAL . . . . . . . 319
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING U0141–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1841–SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH INPUT FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
B1844–SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH INPUT CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 U0019–CAN B BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
B1847–SUNROOF VENT SWITCH INPUT B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW –
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
B1849–SUNROOF MOTOR CONTROL B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . 326
CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE (STALLED) . . . . . 317 SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS ...... . . . . . 327
POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
WK POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS 8N - 305
B1841–SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8N - 306 POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS WK
B1841–SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
For the Sunroof circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP - SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
Theory of Operation
The Sunroof Motor/Module supplies a 12 volt supply circuit to the sunroof switch. When the switch is closed to any
of the 3 sense circuits (open, close or vent), it sends that command back to the module.
• When Monitored:
Whenever the Sunroof module is awake.
• Set Condition:
Whenever the module has determined that the open switch has been applied for over 15 seconds or there is
a short to voltage on the Sunroof Open Switch Sense circuit, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q3) SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(Q3) SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT
SUNROOF SWITCH SHORTED
SUNROOF MOTOR/MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Press and release the Sunroof Switch in all positions several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1841–SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH
INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not
present at this time. Check the switch for any binding con-
ditions and using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide,
inspect the wiring and connectors.
WK POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS 8N - 307
B1841–SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
2. SUNROOF SWITCH SHORTED
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Sunroof Switch connector.
Turn the ignition on and wait 30 seconds.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1841–SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH
INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Sunroof Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
3. (Q3) SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
NOTE: To further diagnose the sunroof, it is necessary to lower
or remove the headliner.
Turn the ignition off.
Lower the headliner to gain access to the Sunroof Motor/Module con-
nector.
Disconnect the Sunroof Motor/Module connector.
NOTE: Ensure the A-Pillar connector is connected before pro-
ceeding.
Turn the ignition on.
Measure the voltage between the (Q3) Sunroof Open Switch Sense
circuit and Ground.
Is the voltage above 0.4 volts?
Yes >> Repair the (Q3) Sunroof Open Switch Sense circuit for a
short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go To 4
8N - 308 POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS WK
B1841–SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
4. (Q3) SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the A-Pillar connector.
Measure the resistance between the (Q3) Sunroof Open Switch Sense
circuit and the (Q6) Sunroof Switch Supply circuit in the Sunroof
Motor/Module connector.
Is the resistance below 1000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (Q3) Sunroof Open Switch Sense circuit for a
short to the (Q6) Sunroof Switch Supply circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module.
Perform the Sunroof Position Calibration, (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PRO-
CEDURE - SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION). Per-
form the Excessive Force Limitation Calibration, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR -
STANDARD PROCEDURE - EXCESSIVE FORCE LIMITATION CALIBRATION).
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS 8N - 309
B1844–SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8N - 310 POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS WK
B1844–SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
For the Sunroof circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP - SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
Theory of Operation
The Sunroof Motor/Module supplies a 12 volt supply circuit to the sunroof switch. When the switch is closed to any
of the 3 sense circuits (open, close or vent), it sends that command back to the module.
• When Monitored:
Whenever the Sunroof module is awake.
• Set Condition:
Whenever the module has determined that the close switch has been applied for over 15 seconds or there is
a short to voltage on the Sunroof Close Switch Sense circuit, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q5) SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(Q5) SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT
SUNROOF SWITCH SHORTED
SUNROOF MOTOR/MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Press and release the Sunroof Switch in all positions several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1844–SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH
INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not
present at this time. Check the switch for any binding con-
ditions and using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide,
inspect the wiring and connectors.
WK POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS 8N - 311
B1844–SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
2. SUNROOF SWITCH SHORTED
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Sunroof Switch connector.
Turn the ignition on and wait 30 seconds.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1844–SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH
INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Sunroof Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
3. (Q5) SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
NOTE: To further diagnose the sunroof, it is necessary to lower
or remove the headliner.
Turn the ignition off.
Lower the headliner to gain access to the Sunroof Motor/Module con-
nector.
Disconnect the Sunroof Motor/Module connector.
NOTE: Ensure the A-Pillar connector is connected before pro-
ceeding.
Turn the ignition on.
Measure the voltage between the (Q5) Sunroof Close Switch Sense
circuit and Ground.
Is the voltage above 0.4 volts?
Yes >> Repair the (Q5) Sunroof Close Switch Sense circuit for a short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go To 4
8N - 312 POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS WK
B1844–SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
4. (Q5) SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the A-Pillar connector.
Measure the resistance between the (Q5) Sunroof Close Switch Sense
circuit and the (Q6) Sunroof Switch Supply circuit in the Sunroof
Motor/Module connector.
Is the resistance below 1000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (Q5) Sunroof Close Switch Sense circuit for a
short to the (Q6) Sunroof Switch Supply circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module.
Perform the Sunroof Position Calibration, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STAN-
DARD PROCEDURE - SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION). Perform the Excessive Force Limitation
Calibration, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE - EXCES-
SIVE FORCE LIMITATION CALIBRATION).
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS 8N - 313
B1847–SUNROOF VENT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8N - 314 POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS WK
B1847–SUNROOF VENT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
For the Sunroof circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP - SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
Theory of Operation
The Sunroof Motor/Module supplies a 12 volt supply circuit to the sunroof switch. When the switch is closed to any
of the 3 sense circuits (open, close or vent), it sends that command back to the module.
• When Monitored:
Whenever the Sunroof module is awake.
• Set Condition:
Whenever the module has determined that the vent switch has been applied for over 15 seconds or there is
a short to voltage on the Sunroof Vent Switch Sense circuit, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q4) SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(Q4) SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT
SUNROOF SWITCH SHORTED
SUNROOF MOTOR/MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Press and release the Sunroof Switch in all positions several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1847–SUNROOF VENT SWITCH
INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not
present at this time. Check the switch for any binding con-
ditions and using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide,
inspect the wiring and connectors.
WK POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS 8N - 315
B1847–SUNROOF VENT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
2. SUNROOF SWITCH SHORTED
With the scan tool, erase DTC’s.
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the Sunroof Switch connector.
Turn the ignition on and wait 30 seconds.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1847–SUNROOF VENT SWITCH
INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> Replace the Sunroof Switch.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
3. (Q4) SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
NOTE: To further diagnose the sunroof, it is necessary to lower
or remove the headliner.
Turn the ignition off.
Lower the headliner to gain access to the Sunroof Motor/Module con-
nector.
Disconnect the Sunroof Motor/Module connector.
NOTE: Ensure the A-Pillar connector is connected before pro-
ceeding.
Turn the ignition on.
Measure the voltage between the (Q4) Sunroof Vent Switch Sense cir-
cuit and Ground.
Is the voltage above 0.4 volts?
Yes >> Repair the (Q4) Sunroof Vent Switch Sense circuit for a short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Go To 4
8N - 316 POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS WK
B1847–SUNROOF VENT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (CONTINUED)
4. (Q4) SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the A-Pillar connector.
Measure the resistance between the (Q4) Sunroof Vent Switch Sense
circuit and the (Q6) Sunroof Switch Supply circuit in the Sunroof
Motor/Module connector.
Is the resistance below 1000.0 ohms?
Yes >> Repair the (Q4) Sunroof Vent Switch Sense circuit for a
short to the (Q6) Sunroof Switch Supply circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module.
Perform the Sunroof Position Calibration, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STAN-
DARD PROCEDURE - SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION). Perform the Excessive Force Limitation
Calibration, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE - EXCES-
SIVE FORCE LIMITATION CALIBRATION).
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS 8N - 317
B1849–SUNROOF MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE (STALLED)
For the Sunroof circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP - SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Whenever the Sunroof motor/module is in motion.
• Set Condition:
Whenever the sunroof motor/module is attempting to move the sunroof in response to the input switches (or in
response to an obstacle), and it doesn’t appear to be responding correctly. This code is usually set when there
is some type of binding in the sunroof mechanism.
Possible Causes
SUNROOF MOTOR/MODULE
MECHANICAL BINDING, STICKING OR CABLES OUT OF CALIBRATION
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the Sunroof Switch in all positions several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B1849–SUNROOF MOTOR CON-
TROLCIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE (STALLED)?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not
present at this time. Check for any binding or sticking
conditions.
8N - 318 POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS WK
B1849–SUNROOF MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE (STALLED) (CONTINUED)
2. SUNROOF MOTOR
NOTE: To further diagnose the sunroof, it is necessary to lower or remove the headliner.
NOTE: Any time the Sunroof Motor is removed, it is necessary to perform the Position Calibration when the
motor is re-installed.
Turn the ignition off.
Lower the headliner to gain access to the Sunroof Motor/Module.
Remove the Sunroof Motor/Module from the sunroof.
NOTE: Ensure the A-Pillar connector is connected before proceeding.
Turn the ignition on.
While holding the motor firmly in your hand, have an assistant press the sunroof switch Open and after the motor
stops press Close (NOT VENT) several times and observe the motor operation.
Did the motor operate smoothly and powerful?
Yes >> Repair or replace the sunroof mechanism as necessary in accordance with Service Information.Perform
BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES
- STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Replace the Sunroof Motor Module.
Perform the Sunroof Position Calibration. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STAN-
DARD PROCEDURE) Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELEC-
TRONIC CONTROL MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS 8N - 319
B2227–SUNROOF ECU INTERNAL
For the Sunroof circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP - SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Whenever the Sunroof module is awake.
• Set Condition:
Whenever the module has determined that there is a motor or electronic malfunction, this code will set.
Possible Causes
SUNROOF MOTOR/MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Operate the Sunroof Switch in all positions several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display B2227–SUNROOF ECU INTERNAL?
Yes >> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module.
Perform the Sunroof Position Calibration, (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PRO-
CEDURE - SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION). Per-
form the Excessive Force Limitation Calibration, (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD
PROCEDURE - EXCESSIVE FORCE LIMITATION CALI-
BRATION).
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Operate the Sunroof several
times and recheck for DTC’s. If the code reappears now or later, replace the Sunroof Motor/Module.
8N - 320 POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS WK
U0141–LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
WK POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS 8N - 321
U0019–CAN B BUS
8N - 322 POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS WK
U0019–CAN B BUS (CONTINUED)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
Continuously
• Set Condition:
Whenever the CAN B Bus (+) or CAN B Bus (-) circuit is open, shorted to voltage or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
CAN B BUS DTC’s IN FRONT CONTROL MODULE
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
SUNROOF MOTOR/MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTCS
With the scan tool, read the active DTC’s.
Cycle the ignition switch from off to on at least 5 times, leaving the
ignition on for a minimum of 90 seconds per cycle.
Turn the ignition off and wait 30 seconds.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read the active DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display this DTC as active?
Yes >> Go To 2
No >> If the DTC is stored, check for an intermittent condition.
Visually inspect the related wiring harness connectors.
Look for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
2. CHECK FRONT CONTROL MODULE DTC’s
With the scan tool, read Front Control Module active DTC’s
Does the scan tool display any CAN B BUS DTC’s – ACTIVE?
Yes >> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No >> Go To 3
WK POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS 8N - 323
U0019–CAN B BUS (CONTINUED)
3. (D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
Turn the ignition off.
Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Disconnect the Sunroof Motor/Module connector.
Disconnect the Front Control Module C1 connector.
Measure the resistance of the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit between
the Front Control Module C1 connector and the Sunroof Motor/Module
connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes >> Go To 4
No >> Repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
4. (D54) CAN B BUS (–) CIRCUIT OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (D54) CAN B Bus (–) circuit between
the Front Control Module C1 connector and the Sunroof Motor/Module
connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms?
Yes >> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module in accordance with the
service information.
Perform the Sunroof Position Calibration, (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PRO-
CEDURE - SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION). Per-
form the Excessive Force Limitation Calibration, (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD
PROCEDURE - EXCESSIVE FORCE LIMITATION CALI-
BRATION).
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Repair the (D54) CAN B Bus (–) circuit for an open.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST – VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
8N - 324 POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS WK
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW – SUNROOF
For the Power Top circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP - SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
At all times.
• Set Condition:
Anytime the module senses voltage input below 10 volts (motor operating or not). After this code is set, it
becomes stored when the voltage exceeds 10.1 volts.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
LOW VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC
(A932) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT RESISTED
SUNROOF MOTOR/MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK ENGINE DTC’s
NOTE: Ensure the battery is fully charged before proceeding.
With the scan tool, read ENGINE DTC’s
Are there any ENGINE BATTERY OR CHARGING SYSTEM
DTC’s present?
No >> Go to 2
Yes >> Refer to symptom list for problems related to ENGINE.
2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Start the engine and run for 2 minutes.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW in the Sunroof module only?
Yes >> Go To 3
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS 8N - 325
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW – SUNROOF (CONTINUED)
3. (A932) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT RESISTED
Turn the ignition off.
Lower the headliner and disconnect the Sunroof Motor/Module con-
nector.
Test for a resisted (A932) Fused B(+) circuit by connecting a 12-volt
test light between the (A932) Fused B(+) circuit and the (Z914)
Ground circuit in the Sunroof Motor/Module connector. The test light
must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct
connection to the battery.
Does the test light illuminate brightly?
Yes >> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module in accordance with
Service Information. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
TOP/MOTOR - REMOVAL)
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES -
STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> Test the (A932) Fused B(+) and the (Z914) Ground circuits to determine which circuit is resisted. Repair
the (A932) Fused B(+) circuit or the (Z914) Ground circuit for high resistance.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
8N - 326 POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS WK
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
For the Power Top circuit diagram (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP - SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS)
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
• When Monitored:
At all times.
• Set Condition:
Anytime the module senses voltage input above 16 volts. This code will become stored when the voltage
drops below 15.9 volts.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC
SUNROOF MOTOR/ MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1. CHECK ENGINE DTC’s
With the scan tool, read ENGINE DTC’s
Are there any ENGINE DTC’s present?
No >> Go to 2
Yes >> Refer to symptom list for problems related to ENGINE.
2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION
With the scan tool, record and erase DTC’s
Start the engine and run for 2 minutes.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
Turn the ignition on.
With the scan tool, read DTC’s.
Does the scan tool display BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH in this module only?
Yes >> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module in accordance with service information. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
POWER TOP/MOTOR - REMOVAL)
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No >> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/sche-
matic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
WK POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS 8N - 327
SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS
WK SUNROOF CIRCUIT
8N - 328 POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO WK
POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO EXCESSIVE FORCE LIMITATION (EFL)
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
POWER TOP - SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 SWITCH - SUNROOF
MOTOR/MODULE-SUNROOF DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
MOTOR/MODULE - SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . 331 DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
STANDARD PROCEDURE SWITCH - POWER SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . 334
SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION . . . . . . 331
WK POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO 8N - 329
POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO
DESCRIPTION
The power sunroof system allows the sunroof to be opened, closed or placed in the vent position electrically by
actuating a switch in the overhead console. The sunroof system receives battery feed through a fuse in the Power
Distribution Center (PDC). The sunroof will operate normally with the key in any position while the Accessory Delay
system is active.
8N - 330 POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO WK
The sunroof glass panel tilts upward at the rear for ventilation and slides rearward under the roof when open. The
panel seals flush with the roof in the closed position to eliminate wind noise. The sunroof includes a manual-sliding
sunshade to cover the deep-tinted glass panel.
In addition to the standard power sunroof operation, this vehicle offers several additional features. There is an
express (one-touch) opening and closing feature as well as Excessive Force Limitation (EFL). The EFL function
detects obstacles trapped between the glass and the vehicle roof during a closing motion. Upon sensing an obstacle
the EFL function will reverse direction of the glass to allow removal of the obstacle.
The main components of the power sunroof system are:
• The motor/module assembly
• The power sunroof glass and frame assembly
• The power sunroof switch
• The manual-sliding sunshade
OPERATION
This vehicle has a vent, tilt and slide power sunroof system with express (one-touch) open and closing feature. The
sunroof system receives constant battery feed through a fuse in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The sunroof
will operate normally with the key in any position while the Accessory Delay system is active. If the sunroof is mov-
ing when the key is turned to the START position (crank engine), all motions stop until the key is released, then the
previously requested sunroof motion will resume. The sunroof will also complete a requested motion if the Acces-
sory Delay system goes inactive while the motion is in progress.
A combination push-button and rocker switch module mounted in the overhead console controls sunroof operation.
The sunroof switch is a rocker design with a push button in the center of the two halves of the rocker. Pressing the
rocker towards the front of the car commands the sunroof closed. Pressing the rocker towards the rear of the car
commands the sunroof open. Pressing the center push button commands the sunroof up into the vent position
(Rear of sunroof glass raises above the vehicle roof with glass still covering the sunroof opening). All switch com-
mands operate with the glass starting in any position. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/SWITCH - OPER-
ATION) for additional information.
An electronic control system, integral to the motor/module assembly, provides the express open and close functions.
Pressing the 9open9 or 9close9 end of the rocker switch moves the sunroof glass panel to the full open or full closed
position, respectively. During express closing, anytime an obstacle is detected in the way of the glass, the motor will
stop and reverse travel to avoid pinching an occupant’s finger, ice in the track, etc. This function is called Excessive
Force Limitation (EFL). There are two methods of overriding the EFL function.
1. When three EFL events occur without the glass being allowed to fully close, the next close attempt will only
move while the close switch is continuously actuated. This allows the sunroof to be forced closed if multiple close
attempts fail.
2. If the sunroof close switch is continuously actuated during an EFL event, through the reversal, and during a two
second wait time, then continuing to hold the close switch will cause the roof to move towards close with the EFL
protection disabled. This allows the sunroof to be forced closed if it is known that a reversal will occur.
While in EFL override, the closing motion will cease if the sunroof switch is released at any time.
The motor/module is programmed to learn the speed required to drive the panel based on position and recalibrates
itself as needed. If the sunroof becomes uncalibrated, it will only respond to the vent switch. If the vent switch is
pressed, the glass will move toward vent; if the switch is released, all motion stops. In the event that the sunroof
system becomes uncalibrated perform the sunroof position calibration procedure, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE -SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION).
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
POWER TOP - SUNROOF
Any diagnosis of the power sunroof system should begin with the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic
Procedures Information. The scan tool can provide confirmation that the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus is
functional, that all of the electronic modules are sending and receiving the proper messages on the CAN Data Bus,
and that the power sunroof motor is being sent the proper hard wired output by the sunroof switch.
WK POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO 8N - 331
For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring dia-
grams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out
information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds.
Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.
MOTOR/MODULE-SUNROOF
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
MOTOR/MODULE - SUNROOF
Any diagnosis of the power sunroof system should begin with the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic
Procedures Information. The scan tool can provide confirmation that the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus is
functional, that all of the electronic modules are sending and receiving the proper messages on the CAN Data Bus,
and that the power sunroof motor is being sent the proper hard wired output by the sunroof switch.
For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring dia-
grams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out
information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds.
Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION
Press the power sunroof switch (Open, Closed, and Vent). If no movement occurs when either the open switch or
closed switch is pressed, but the system does move when the vent button is pressed and held, the system is not
calibrated. Perform the following procedure to position calibrate the power sunroof system.
1. Turn the ignition to the RUN position.
2. Press the vent button on the power sunroof switch and hold until the sunroof glass panel has moved to the full
vent position and the motor movement has stopped for at least 1 second.
3. Press the close switch on the power sunroof switch and hold for a moment (at least 100ms) and release. The
sunroof glass panel should continue travel to the full close position. If the sunroof glass panel does not return to
the full close position, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information for full system diagnosis.
4. Verify proper system operation.
EXCESSIVE FORCE LIMITATION (EFL) CALIBRATION
NOTE: Verify the battery is in good condition prior to performing this procedure. Do not leave the vehicle on
a battery charger while performing this procedure. If the voltage at the sunroof motor/module drops below
11 volts or exceeds 15 volts at anytime while this procedure is being performed, the Excessive Force Lim-
itation (EFL) function will not be properly calibrated.
1. Turn the ignition to the RUN position.
2. Press the vent button on the power sunroof switch and hold until the sunroof glass panel has moved to the full
vent position and the motor movement has stopped for at least 1 second.
3. Press the close position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue
travel to the full closed position. This will be considered the first sunroof closed position in a series of four
sunroof closes.
4. Press the vent button on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should move to the full
vent position. After the sunroof motor/module has stopped, press the close position on the power sunroof switch
and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue travel to the full closed position. This will be considered
the second sunroof closed position in a series of four sunroof closes.
5. Continue to move the sunroof glass to the “vent” then “closed” positions two more times so that the sunroof glass
has moved to the closed position a total of four times starting with the first sunroof close in step 3.
8N - 332 POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO WK
6. Press the open position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue travel
to the full open position.
7. Press the close position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue
travel to the full closed position. This will be considered the first sunroof closed position in a series of five
sunroof closes.
8. Press the open position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should move to the
full open position. After the sunroof motor/module has stopped, press the close position on the power sunroof
switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue travel to the full closed position. Continue to move
the sunroof glass to the “open” then “closed” position four more times so that the sunroof glass has
moved to the closed position a total of five times starting with the first sunroof close in step 7.
Verify proper EFL calibration by placing a standard pencil at the front of the sunroof and then moving the
sunroof to the full closed position. The sunroof should reverse direction upon contact without damage to
the pencil.
REMOVAL
WARNING: The Excessive Force Limitation (EFL) feature must be calibrated any time a sunroof motor/mod-
ule is replaced with a new component. Failure to perform this procedure could result in vehicle damage
and/or personal injury. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE - EXCES-
SIVE FORCE LIMITATION (EFL) CALIBRATION) for the appropriate procedure.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
2. Remove the vehicle headliner, (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/HEADLINER - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the power sunroof motor/module electrical
connector (2).
4. Remove the retaining screws (3) and remove the
motor/module (1) from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: The Excessive Force Limitation (EFL) feature must be calibrated any time a sunroof motor/mod-
ule is replaced with a new component. Failure to perform this procedure could result in vehicle damage
and/or personal injury. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE - EXCES-
SIVE FORCE LIMITATION (EFL) CALIBRATION) for the appropriate procedure.
WK POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO 8N - 333
1. Position the power sunroof motor/module (1) in the
vehicle.
2. Install the motor/module retaining screws (3).
Tighten the screws to 4 N·m (35 in. lbs.).
3. Connect the motor/module electrical connector (2).
4. Connect the battery negative cable and move the
sunroof through one open and close cycle to con-
firm proper system operation.
5. Install the vehicle headliner, (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INTERIOR/HEADLINER - INSTALLATION).
6. Perform the sunroof position calibration, (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STAN-
DARD PROCEDURE - SUNROOF POSITION
CALIBRATION).
7. Perform the Excessive Force Limitation (EFL) cali-
bration, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/
MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE -
EXCESSIVE FORCE LIMITATION (EFL) CALIBRA-
TION).
8. Verify proper operation of the power sunroof system.
SWITCH - SUNROOF
DESCRIPTION
The power sunroof switch (3) is a combination push-
button and rocker switch module mounted in the over-
head console. The sunroof switch is a direct contact
unit that is directly wired to the sunroof motor/module
assembly. The sunroof switch performs the following
functions:
• Power sunroof open (back of switch pushed)
• Power sunroof closed (front of switch pushed)
• Power sunroof vent (switch center button
pushed)
The power sunroof switch is part of the overhead
console assembly and cannot be replaced sepa-
rately. If the switch is damaged or inoperative the
overhead console must be replaced, (Refer to 8 -
ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE - REMOVAL).
OPERATION
The power sunroof switch is hard wired to the sunroof motor/module assembly. The switch receives battery current
from the motor/module when the ignition switch is in the RUN and ACCESSORY positions or the vehicle Accessory
Delay System is active. When one of the switch positions is pressed it sends battery current back to the motor/
module, signaling it to move the power sunroof to the appropriate position. The motor/module will perform one of the
following functions:
• Power sunroof open (back of switch pushed)
• Power sunroof closed (front of switch pushed)
• Power sunroof vent (switch center button pushed)
8N - 334 POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO WK
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
SWITCH - POWER SUNROOF
Any diagnosis of the power sunroof system should begin with the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic
Procedures Information. The scan tool can provide confirmation that the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus
circuit is functional, that all of the electronic modules are sending and receiving the proper messages on the CAN
Data Bus, and that the power sunroof motor/module assembly is being sent the proper hard wired output by the
sunroof switch.
For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring dia-
grams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out
information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. If completing the
appropriate diagnostic information results in the sunroof switch being inoperative, perform the following test prior to
switch replacement.
1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
2. Remove the overhead console, (Refer to 8 - ELEC-
TRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the power sunroof switch wire harness
connector.
4. Using an ohmmeter, test the continuity of the
power sunroof switch in each switch position. Refer
to the POWER SUNROOF SWITCH CONTINUITY
TABLE . If OK, inspect the wiring harness and con-
nectors for damage. Use a scan tool and the
proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to com-
plete diagnosis of the power sunroof system. If not
OK, replace the overhead console.
POWER SUNROOF SWITCH CONTINUITY TABLE
SWITCH POSITION CONTINUITY BETWEEN PINS
OFF NO CONTINUITY
SUNROOF OPEN B&D
SUNROOF CLOSED B&C
SUNROOF VENT B&A
WK POWER WINDOWS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 335
POWER WINDOWS - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page page
POWER WINDOWS - SERVICE INFORMATION REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 SWITCH-POWER WINDOW
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING POWER WINDOW SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
MOTOR-WINDOW INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
WINDOW MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
POWER WINDOWS - SERVICE INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The power window system allows each of the door windows to be raised and lowered electrically by actuating a
switch on the trim panel of each respective door. A master switch on the driver side front door trim panel allows the
driver to raise or lower each of the passenger door windows and to lock out the individual switches on the pas-
senger doors from operation. The power window system receives battery feed through a circuit breaker, only when
the ignition switch is in the On position.
The power window system includes the power window switches on each door trim panel, the circuit breaker, and the
power window motors inside each door.
The power window motor is integral to the power window regulator unit. If the power window motor is inoperative or
damaged, the entire power window regulator unit must be replaced. (Refer to 23 - BODY/DOOR - FRONT/WINDOW
REGULATOR - REMOVAL) or (Refer to 23 - BODY/DOORS - REAR/WINDOW REGULATOR - REMOVAL) for the
window regulator service procedures.
OPERATION
POWER WINDOW SWITCH
The power windows are controlled by a window/lock switch on the trim panel of each front door. Switches in the
driver door window/lock switch allows the driver to control the passenger windows.
The power window switch for the driver side front door window has a second detent position beyond the normal
Down position that provides an automatic one-touch window down feature. This feature is controlled by the window/
lock switch.
The power window switches control the battery and ground feeds to the power window motors. All of the passenger
door power window switches receive their battery and ground feeds through the circuitry of the window/lock switch.
When the power window lockout switch is in the Lock position, the battery feed for the individual passenger door
power window switches is interrupted.
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
A permanent magnet reversible motor moves the window regulator through an integral gearbox mechanism. A pos-
itive and negative battery connection to the two motor terminals will cause the motor to rotate in one direction.
Reversing the current through these same two connections will cause the motor to rotate in the opposite direction.
In addition, each power window motor is equipped with an integral self-resetting circuit breaker to protect the motor
from overloads. The power window motor and gearbox assembly cannot be repaired and, if inoperative or damaged,
the power window regulator must be replaced.
8N - 336 POWER WINDOWS - SERVICE INFORMATION WK
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
POWER WINDOWS
For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information.
ALL WINDOWS INOPERATIVE
1. Check the circuit breaker. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, replace the inoperative circuit breaker.
2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the window/lock switch from the driver side front door
trim panel. Unplug the wire harness connector.
3. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the door module wire harness connector and a good
ground. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the circuit to ground as required.
4. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery voltage at the
fused ignition switch output (run) circuit cavity of the window/lock switch wire harness connector. If OK, (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS/POWER LOCK SWITCH - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If not OK, repair the
circuit as required.
ONE WINDOW INOPERATIVE
The window glass must be free to slide up and down for the power window motor to function properly. If the glass
is not free to move up and down, the motor will overload and trip the integral circuit breaker. To determine if the
glass is free, disconnect the regulator from the glass. Then slide the window up and down by hand.
There is an alternate method to check if the glass is free. Position the glass between the up and down stops. Then,
shake the glass in the door. Check that the glass can be moved slightly from side to side, front to rear, and up and
down. Then check that the glass is not bound tight in the tracks. If the glass is free, proceed with the diagnosis that
follows. If the glass is not free, determine the cause of the condition.
If the only inoperative window is in the driver or passenger side front door and the preceding checks have not
identified a problem, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER WINDOWS/WINDOW MOTOR - DIAGNOSIS AND TEST-
ING). If the problem being diagnosed involves only the Auto-down feature for the driver side front door window, but
all of the power windows are operational, replace the driver’s side window/lock switch. For diagnosis of the window/
lock switch, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS/POWER LOCK SWITCH - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
For a rear power window problem proceed with the following:
1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Unplug the wire harness connector from the power window
switch unit on the door with the inoperative power window. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity
of the power window switch wire harness connector and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to
Step 2. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the power window and door lock master switch as required.
2. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery voltage at the
fused ignition switch output (run) circuit cavity in the body half of the power window switch unit wire harness
connector. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the power window and door lock master
switch as required.
3. Test the power window switch continuity (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER WINDOWS/POWER WINDOW
SWITCH - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, replace the power window switch.
4. Check the continuity in each circuit between the inoperative power window switch wire harness connector cavi-
ties and the corresponding power window motor wire harness connector cavities. If OK, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRI-
CAL/POWER WINDOWS/WINDOW MOTOR - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If not OK, repair the open circuit(s)
as required.
NOTE: All passenger door power window switches receive their battery and ground feed for operating the
passenger door power window motors through the driver side power window and lock master switch and
wire harness connector.
WK POWER WINDOWS - SERVICE INFORMATION 8N - 337
MOTOR-WINDOW
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
WINDOW MOTOR
For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information.
1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the trim panel from the door with the inoperative
power window.
2. Unplug the power window motor wire harness connector. Apply 12 volts across the motor terminals to check its
operation in one direction. Reverse the connections across the motor terminals to check the operation in the
other direction. If the window is in the full up or full down position, the motor will not operate in that direction by
design. If OK, repair the circuits from the power window motor to the power window switch as required. If not
OK, replace the inoperative motor.
3. If the motor operates in both directions, check the operation of the window glass and lift mechanism through its
complete up and down travel. There should be no binding or sticking of the window glass or lift mechanism
through the entire travel range. If not OK, check the window glass, tracks, and regulator for sticking, binding, or
improper adjustment.
REMOVAL
The power window motor is integral to the power window regulator unit. If the power window motor is inoperative or
damaged, the entire power window regulator unit must be replaced. (Refer to 23 - BODY/DOOR - FRONT/WINDOW
REGULATOR - REMOVAL) or (Refer to 23 - BODY/DOORS - REAR/WINDOW REGULATOR - REMOVAL) for the
window regulator service procedures.
SWITCH-POWER WINDOW
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
POWER WINDOW SWITCH
The front door power window switches are included in the window/lock switch (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
POWER LOCKS/POWER LOCK SWITCH - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the power window switch knobs receive battery current
through the power window circuit breaker in the junction block. If all of the LEDs are inoperative in the power win-
dow switch and the power windows are inoperative, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER WINDOWS - DIAGNOSIS
AND TESTING). If the power windows operate, but any or all of the LEDs are inoperative, the power window and
lock switch units with the inoperative LED(s) must be replaced. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appro-
priate wiring information.
1. Check the fuse and the circuit breaker. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, replace the fuse or circuit breaker.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery voltage at the power window fuse. If OK, turn the
ignition switch to the Off position and go to Step 3. If not OK, check circuit breaker and repair the circuit to the
ignition switch as required.
3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the power window switch from the door trim panel.
Unplug the wire harness connector from the switch.
4. Test the power window switch continuity. See the Power Window Switch Continuity chart to determine if the con-
tinuity is correct in the Neutral, Up and Down switch positions. If OK, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER WIN-
DOWS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If not OK, replace the inoperative switch.
8N - 338 POWER WINDOWS - SERVICE INFORMATION WK
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH CONTINUITY CHART
SWITCH POSITION CONTINUITY BETWEEN
NEUTRAL PIN 3 & 4, PIN 1 & 2
UP PIN 6 & 3, PIN 1 & 2
DOWN PIN 6 & 2, PIN 3 & 4
REMOVAL
The driver and front passenger side power window switch is included in the window/lock switch. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS/POWER LOCK SWITCH - REMOVAL) for the service procedures.
1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
2. Remove the door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/
DOORS - REAR/TRIM PANEL - REMOVAL).
3. Remove switch from door trim panel.
INSTALLATION
The driver and front passenger side power window
switch is included in the window/lock switch.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS/POWER
LOCK SWITCH - INSTALLATION).
1. Install the switch to the door trim panel.
2. Install the door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/
DOORS - REAR/TRIM PANEL - INSTALLATION).
3. Connect the battery negative cable.